WO2022082767A1 - Communication method and related device - Google Patents

Communication method and related device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022082767A1
WO2022082767A1 PCT/CN2020/123396 CN2020123396W WO2022082767A1 WO 2022082767 A1 WO2022082767 A1 WO 2022082767A1 CN 2020123396 W CN2020123396 W CN 2020123396W WO 2022082767 A1 WO2022082767 A1 WO 2022082767A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ssb
candidate
candidate ssb
positions
indication information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/123396
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
乔梁
张佳胤
范巍巍
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/123396 priority Critical patent/WO2022082767A1/en
Publication of WO2022082767A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022082767A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/08Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communication, and in particular, to a communication method and related equipment.
  • SSB synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block
  • SSB can also be referred to as a synchronization signal block or an initial access signal for short.
  • the network device may send the SSB in one or more downlink transmit beam directions with an associated relationship, so as to improve the access success rate of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines different candidate SSB positions through a parameter indicating the candidate SSB positions, and determines the association relationship between the different candidate SSB positions through the association parameter between the candidate SSB positions.
  • the association relationship is generally indicated by a 3-bit (bits) demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS) sequence, that is, the DMRS can indicate one of 8 or less different candidate SSB positions by 3-bits relationship between.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the number of candidate SSB positions used by the network device for sending SSB is large, for example, more than 8, since the correlation parameter cannot indicate the correlation between the large number of different candidate SSB positions, it is easy to cause the terminal equipment to demodulate SSB fails, increasing the access delay of terminal equipment.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and related equipment, which are used to improve the success rate of terminal equipment to demodulate SSB, shorten the initial access time of the terminal equipment during the initial access process, and improve the reliability of initial access. to improve communication efficiency.
  • a first aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a terminal device, and can also be applied to the execution of components of the terminal device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.).
  • the terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB groups, wherein at least two candidate SSBs in the multiple candidate SSB group positions The group positions have an association relationship; then, the terminal device detects the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
  • the terminal device after the terminal device receives the first indication information sent from the network device and used to indicate the positions of the multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB group, the terminal device defaults (determines) according to the first indication information and the association relationship. Different candidate SSB positions within the listening window that satisfy the relationship have the same SSB index, that is, multiple candidate SSB group positions can be determined within the listening window, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions There is an association relationship; after that, the terminal device detects the SSB in the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
  • the terminal device detects SSBs according to the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions among multiple candidate SSB group positions in the listening window, which can improve the ability of the terminal device to demodulate SSBs.
  • the success rate in the initial access process, shortens the access delay of the initial access of the terminal equipment, improves the reliability of the initial access, and thus improves the communication efficiency.
  • At least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are located in at least two candidate SSB positions respectively Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
  • the terminal device can be based on Different candidate SSBs are in multiple candidate SSB group positions in the listening window, and the SSB is detected according to the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB positions, which can further improve the success rate of the terminal device to demodulate the SSB.
  • the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
  • the association relationship is specific Can be a QCL relationship.
  • the method before the terminal device detects the SSB in the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship, the method further includes: the terminal device receives data from the network The second indication information of the device, the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship; then, the terminal device determines the association relationship according to the second indication information.
  • the terminal device can determine the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group locations among the multiple candidate SSB group locations according to the second indication information from the network device, that is, the terminal device can determine the The association relationship further improves the access success rate in the initial access process of the terminal device according to the detected SSB sent from the network device.
  • the terminal device determining the association relationship according to the second indication information includes: the terminal device determining the association relationship according to the second indication information and the third indication information , the third indication information includes the first indication information, multiple candidate SSB positions, multiple SSB group positions and/or the number of SSBs.
  • the terminal device may further determine, according to the second indication information and the third indication information, an association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group locations among the multiple candidate SSB group locations, where the third indication information may specifically be Including multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions (ie, first indication information), multiple candidate SSB positions, multiple SSB group positions and/or SSB numbers in one or more listening windows.
  • the third indication information may specifically be Including multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions (ie, first indication information), multiple candidate SSB positions, multiple SSB group positions and/or SSB numbers in one or more listening windows.
  • the terminal device Since the third indication information indicates the information of the SSB or SSB group in one or more listening windows, that is, the terminal device uses the third indication information and the second indication information to jointly determine in the process of determining the association relationship, it is possible to optimize the The determination process of the association relationship improves the access success rate in the initial access process of the SSB detected by the terminal device according to the association relationship.
  • the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  • the first indication information can be specifically represented by the physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or the bits corresponding to the demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence, that is, the first indication information can be expressed by the bits in the physical broadcast channel PBCH load And/or the bit implementation representing the DMRS sequence of the demodulation reference signal, provides multiple implementation manners of the first indication information, realizes the flexible configuration of the first indication information, and improves the implementability of the solution.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
  • the first indication information may be implemented by n bits, where the value of n may be 4, 5 or 7, and different values of n may correspond to multiple values indicated by the first indication information
  • the different numbers corresponding to the candidate SSB groups at the positions of the candidate SSB groups provide a variety of implementation manners of the first indication information, so as to realize the flexible configuration of the first reference signal and at the same time improve the implementability of the solution.
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the first candidate SSB group position
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, the second candidate SSB group position
  • the indication information is used to indicate that there is the association relationship between at least one candidate SSB position in the third candidate SSB group position and at least one candidate SSB position in the second candidate SSB group position.
  • the second indication information used to determine the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group locations among the multiple candidate SSB group locations.
  • the second indication information may specifically indicate the association relationship between different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions, and/or the second indication information may specifically indicate that the different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions The relationship between the included at least one candidate SSB location.
  • the terminal device may use corresponding implementation manners in different implementation scenarios, and determine the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions according to the second indication information.
  • the second indication information includes any one of the following:
  • controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero
  • controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero are controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
  • controlResourceSetZero searchSpaceZero
  • searchSpaceZero controlResourceSetZero
  • subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
  • ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset of the SSB between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain and the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB) in the frequency domain;
  • pdcch-ConfigSIB1 including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
  • controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
  • searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
  • the second indication information can be implemented in the above-mentioned various ways, that is, the second indication information can be represented by the bits representing the above parameters, and various implementation ways for the terminal device to obtain the second indication information are provided. , to improve the feasibility of the scheme.
  • the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
  • the second indication information may be implemented by m bits, where the value of m may be 2 or 3, and different values of m may correspond to different association relationships indicated by the second indication information
  • multiple implementation manners of the second indication information are provided, so as to realize the flexible configuration of the second indication information, and at the same time improve the implementability of the solution.
  • the listening window includes a discovery reference signal DRS window, a half-frame duration, or a occupied duration of a synchronization signal burst set SS burst set.
  • the monitoring window for the terminal device to detect the SSB can be implemented in various ways, wherein the monitoring window may include the discovery reference signal DRS window, the half-frame duration or the occupied duration of the synchronization signal burst set SS burst set, so that the terminal The device can use the first indication information and the association relationship to detect the SSB in different scenarios, thereby improving the implementability of the solution.
  • the monitoring window may include the discovery reference signal DRS window, the half-frame duration or the occupied duration of the synchronization signal burst set SS burst set, so that the terminal The device can use the first indication information and the association relationship to detect the SSB in different scenarios, thereby improving the implementability of the solution.
  • a second aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a network device or to the execution of components of the network device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.).
  • the network device Determine a plurality of candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, and at least two candidate SSB group positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship; then, the network device has at least two candidate SSB group positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship.
  • a candidate SSB group position transmits the SSB.
  • the network device first determines multiple candidate SSB group positions, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship;
  • the relationship transmits the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position of the plurality of candidate SSB group positions.
  • the network device sends the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship between different SSB groups, that is, the network device sends the SSB based on the association relationship, so that the terminal device can send the SSB according to the association relationship.
  • the association relationship monitors the SSB sent by the network device, which can improve the success rate of the terminal device to demodulate the SSB.
  • the access delay of the initial access of the terminal device is shortened, and the reliability of the initial access is improved. , so as to improve the communication efficiency.
  • At least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are located in at least two candidate SSB positions respectively Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
  • the terminal device can be based on Different candidate SSBs are in multiple candidate SSB group positions in the listening window, and the SSB is detected according to the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB positions, which can further improve the success rate of the terminal device to demodulate the SSB.
  • the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
  • the association relationship is specific Can be a QCL relationship.
  • the multiple candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the first candidate SSB group position and the first candidate SSB group position
  • the two candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship;
  • the network device sending the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the plurality of candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship includes: the network device performs the first candidate SSB group position before the first candidate SSB group position. LBT; if the LBT fails, the network device sends the SSB at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate group SSB position.
  • the network device needs to perform LBT before sending SSB. If the network device fails to perform LBT at the position of the first candidate SSB group, the network device is in the second candidate that has the association relationship with the first candidate SSB group position. The SSB is sent at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the SSB group position, so that the SSB not sent at the first candidate SSB group position due to the LBT failure is sent at the second candidate SSB group position.
  • the multiple candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, wherein the third candidate SSB group position includes the third candidate SSB group position A candidate SSB position, the fourth candidate SSB position includes the second candidate SSB position, and the third candidate SSB group position and the fourth candidate SSB group position have the association relationship, the first SSB position and the second SSB position Having the association relationship; the network device sending the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship includes: the network device performs LBT at the first candidate SSB position; if the LBT fails, then The network device sends the SSB at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate SSB position.
  • the network device needs to perform LBT before sending the SSB. If the network device fails to perform LBT at the first candidate SSB position in the third candidate SSB group position, the network device has the third candidate SSB group position with the third candidate SSB group position. In the fourth candidate SSB group position of the association relationship, the SSB is sent at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate SSB position having the association relationship with the first candidate SSB position, so that the SSB is not sent at the first candidate SSB position due to LBT failure The SSB is sent at the second candidate SSB location.
  • Another specific implementation manner in which the network device sends the SSB according to the association relationship is provided, while avoiding the occurrence of the SSB sending failure caused by the LBT failure, so that the terminal device receives the first candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate SSB position.
  • the SSB can further improve the reliability of initial access.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the network device, first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups.
  • the network device may also send first indication information for indicating the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB groups to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate synchronization signal block SSB group according to the first indication information position, and further detect SSB (or SSB position, or SSB index) according to the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions in multiple candidate SSB group positions, which can improve the success rate of terminal equipment demodulation SSB.
  • the access delay of the initial access of the terminal device is shortened, the reliability of the initial access is improved, and the communication efficiency is improved.
  • the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  • the first indication information can be specifically represented by the physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or the bits corresponding to the demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence, that is, the first indication information can be expressed by the bits in the physical broadcast channel PBCH load And/or the bit implementation representing the DMRS sequence of the demodulation reference signal, provides multiple implementation manners of the first indication information, realizes the flexible configuration of the first indication information, and improves the implementability of the solution.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
  • the first indication information may be implemented by n bits, where the value of n may be 4, 5 or 7, and different values of n may correspond to multiple values indicated by the first indication information
  • the different numbers corresponding to the candidate SSB groups at the positions of the candidate SSB groups provide a variety of implementation manners of the first indication information, so as to realize the flexible configuration of the first reference signal and at the same time improve the implementability of the solution.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the network device, second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship.
  • the network device can also send the second indication information for determining the association relationship to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine the association relationship according to the instructions of the network device, and further improve the efficiency of the terminal device according to the detected information from the network device.
  • the sent SSB realizes the access success rate in the initial access process.
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a fifth candidate SSB group position and a sixth candidate SSB group position
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the first There is the association between the five candidate SSB group positions and the sixth candidate SSB group position
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a seventh candidate SSB group position and an eighth candidate SSB group position, the second candidate SSB group position
  • the indication information is used to indicate that there is the association relationship between at least one candidate SSB position in the seventh candidate SSB group position and at least one candidate SSB position in the eighth candidate SSB group position.
  • the second indication information used for determining the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group locations among the multiple candidate SSB group locations.
  • the second indication information may specifically indicate the association relationship between different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions, and/or the second indication information may specifically indicate that the different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions The relationship between the included at least one candidate SSB location.
  • the terminal device may use corresponding implementation manners in different implementation scenarios, and determine the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions according to the second indication information.
  • the second indication information includes any one of the following:
  • controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero
  • controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero are controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
  • controlResourceSetZero searchSpaceZero
  • searchSpaceZero controlResourceSetZero
  • subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
  • ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
  • pdcch-ConfigSIB1 including the parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
  • controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
  • searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
  • the second indication information can be implemented in the above-mentioned various ways, that is, the second indication information can be represented by the bits representing the above parameters, and various implementation ways for the terminal device to obtain the second indication information are provided. , to improve the feasibility of the scheme.
  • the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
  • the second indication information may be implemented by m bits, where the value of m may be 2 or 3, and different values of m may correspond to different association relationships indicated by the second indication information
  • Implementation manners multiple implementation manners of the second indication information are provided, so as to realize the flexible configuration of the second indication information and at the same time improve the implementability of the solution.
  • a third aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication device, including a transceiver unit and a processing unit;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive first indication information from a network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, wherein at least two candidate SSB groups in the multiple candidate SSB group positions location is associated;
  • the processing unit is configured to detect the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
  • At least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are located in at least two candidate SSB positions respectively Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
  • the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship;
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine the association relationship according to the second indication information.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to determine the association relationship according to the second indication information and the third indication information, where the third indication information includes the first indication Information, multiple candidate SSB locations, multiple SSB group locations, and/or number of SSBs.
  • the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first candidate SSB group position There is the association between a candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position;
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and the second candidate SSB group position in the third candidate SSB group positions At least one candidate SSB position in the SSB group position has the association relationship.
  • the second indication information includes any one of the following:
  • controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero
  • controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero are controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
  • controlResourceSetZero searchSpaceZero
  • searchSpaceZero controlResourceSetZero
  • subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
  • ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
  • pdcch-ConfigSIB1 including the parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
  • controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
  • searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
  • the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
  • the listening window includes a discovery reference signal DRS window, a half-frame duration, or a occupied duration of a synchronization signal burst set SS burst set.
  • the component modules of the communication device may also be used to perform the steps performed in each possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the first aspect which will not be repeated here.
  • a fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication device, including a transceiver unit and a processing unit;
  • the processing unit is configured to determine multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, and at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an associated relationship;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the plurality of candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship.
  • At least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are located in at least two candidate SSB positions respectively Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
  • the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
  • the plurality of candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the first candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position have the association relation;
  • the transceiver unit is specifically used for:
  • the SSB is sent at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate group SSB position.
  • the plurality of candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, wherein the third candidate SSB group position includes a first candidate SSB group position, the fourth candidate SSB group position The candidate SSB position includes a second candidate SSB position, and the third candidate SSB group position and the fourth candidate SSB group position have the association relationship, and the first SSB position and the second SSB position have the association relationship;
  • the transceiver unit is specifically used for:
  • the SSB is sent at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate SSB position.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups.
  • the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship.
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a fifth candidate SSB group position and a sixth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the fifth candidate SSB group position and the sixth candidate SSB group position
  • the six candidate SSB group positions have this association relationship;
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a seventh candidate SSB group position and an eighth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and the eighth candidate SSB group position in the seventh candidate SSB group positions At least one candidate SSB position in the SSB group position has the association relationship.
  • the second indication information includes any one of the following:
  • controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero
  • controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero are controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
  • controlResourceSetZero searchSpaceZero
  • searchSpaceZero controlResourceSetZero
  • subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
  • ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
  • pdcch-ConfigSIB1 including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
  • controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
  • searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
  • the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
  • the component modules of the communication device may also be used to perform the steps performed in each possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the second aspect which will not be repeated here.
  • a fifth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may specifically be a network device, or may be a component of a network device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.), wherein the communication device includes a processor and a A communication interface, which is coupled to the processor, and the processor is used for running a computer program or instructions, so that the method described in the foregoing first aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect is performed.
  • a sixth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may specifically be a terminal device, or may be a component of the terminal device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.), wherein the communication interface and the processor Coupled, the processor is configured to run a computer program or instructions, so that the method described in the foregoing second aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect is performed.
  • the communication device may specifically be a terminal device, or may be a component of the terminal device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.), wherein the communication interface and the processor Coupled, the processor is configured to run a computer program or instructions, so that the method described in the foregoing second aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect is performed.
  • a seventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores one or more computer-executable instructions.
  • the processor executes the first aspect or any one of the first aspects. a possible implementation of the method described.
  • An eighth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores one or more computer-executable instructions.
  • the processor executes any one of the second aspect or the second aspect above. a possible implementation of the method described.
  • a ninth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a computer program product (or computer program) that stores one or more computers.
  • the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer can execute the first aspect or any of the first aspect. One possible way to do it.
  • a tenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a computer program product that stores one or more computers.
  • the computer program product When the computer program product is executed on a computer, the computer can perform the second aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect. Methods.
  • An eleventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor configured to support an access network device to implement the functions involved in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the chip system may further include a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the access network device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • a twelfth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor for supporting a terminal device to implement the functions involved in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the chip system may further include a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the terminal device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • a thirteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system includes the communication device of the third aspect and the communication device of the fourth aspect, or, the communication system includes the communication device of the fifth aspect and the sixth aspect
  • the communication device of the aspect, or the communication system includes the communication device of the seventh aspect and the communication device of the eighth aspect, or the communication system includes the communication device of the ninth aspect and the communication device of the tenth aspect, or, the communication device
  • a communication system includes the communication device of the eleventh aspect and the communication device of the twelfth aspect.
  • the terminal device after the terminal device receives the first indication information sent from the network device and used to indicate the positions of the multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups, the terminal device will The first indication information and the association relationship have the same SSB index by default (determined) in the listening window, that is, multiple candidate SSB group positions can be determined in the listening window, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions The group position has an association relationship; after that, the terminal device detects the SSB in the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
  • the terminal device detects SSBs according to the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions among multiple candidate SSB group positions in the listening window, which can improve the ability of the terminal device to demodulate SSBs.
  • the success rate in the initial access process, shortens the access delay of the initial access of the terminal equipment, improves the reliability of the initial access, and thus improves the communication efficiency.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network communication architecture in an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an SSB bearing mode in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is another schematic diagram of an SSB bearing mode in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is another schematic diagram of an SSB bearing mode in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a communication method in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 6 is another schematic diagram of a communication method in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic diagram of a communication method in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is another schematic diagram of a communication method in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication device in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is another schematic diagram of a communication device in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is another schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is another schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Terminal device It can be a wireless terminal device that can receive scheduling and instruction information of network devices.
  • the wireless terminal device can be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users, or a handheld device with wireless connection function, or Other processing equipment connected to the wireless modem.
  • Terminal equipment can communicate with one or more core networks or the Internet via a radio access network (RAN), and the terminal equipment can be a mobile terminal equipment, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone, mobile phone (mobile phone), computer and data cards, for example, may be portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer built-in or vehicle mounted mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with the radio access network.
  • a mobile phone or "cellular" phone, mobile phone (mobile phone), computer and data cards
  • PCS personal communication service
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • Tablet Computer tablet Computer
  • Wireless terminal equipment may also be referred to as a system, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station (MS), a remote station, an access point ( access point (AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user agent (user agent), subscriber station (SS), user terminal equipment (customer premises equipment, CPE), terminal (terminal), user equipment (user equipment, UE), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), etc.
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device and a next-generation communication system, for example, a terminal device in a 5G communication system or a terminal device in a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN).
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • Network device It can be a device in a wireless network.
  • a network device can be a radio access network (RAN) node (or device) that connects a terminal device to a wireless network, also known as a base station.
  • RAN equipment are: generation Node B (gNodeB), transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), wireless network in the 5G communication system Controller (radio network controller, RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved Node B , or home Node B, HNB), base band unit (base band unit, BBU), or wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) access point (access point, AP), etc.
  • RNC radio network controller
  • Node B Node B
  • BSC base station controller
  • base transceiver station base transceiver station
  • BTS
  • the network device may include a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) node, or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • a centralized unit centralized unit, CU
  • a distributed unit distributed unit, DU
  • RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • the network device can send configuration information to the terminal device (for example, carried in a scheduling message and/or an instruction message), and the terminal device further performs network configuration according to the configuration information, so that the network configuration between the network device and the terminal device is aligned; or , through the network configuration preset in the network device and the network configuration preset in the terminal device, the network configuration between the network device and the terminal device is aligned.
  • alignment refers to the determination of the carrier frequency for sending and receiving the interaction message, the determination of the type of the interaction message, the meaning of the field information carried in the interaction message, or the The understanding of other configurations of interactive messages is consistent.
  • the network device may be other devices that provide wireless communication functions for the terminal device.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device. For convenience of description, the embodiments of the present application are not limited.
  • the network equipment may also include core network equipment, which includes, for example, an access and mobility management function (AMF), a user plane function (UPF), or a session management function (SMF) Wait.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • SMF session management function
  • the apparatus for implementing the function of the network device may be the network device, or may be an apparatus capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the apparatus may be installed in the network device.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the device for realizing the function of the network device being a network device as an example.
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably.
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • And/or which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are an “or” relationship.
  • At least one item(s) below” or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s).
  • At least one of A, B and C includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC.
  • ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects degree.
  • the present application can be applied to an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) communication system as shown in FIG. 1 , including network equipment and multiple terminal equipments (UEs).
  • UE1-UE5 can all communicate with network equipment, the link environment includes uplink, downlink and side-link, and the information transmitted in the link includes actually transmitted data information , and control information to indicate or schedule actual data.
  • UE3, UE4 and UE5 can also form a communication system, and the link transmission environment thereof is the same as the above, and the specific information exchange can depend on the configuration of the network.
  • the technologies deployed in the shared frequency band are collectively called new radio unlicensed (new radio unlicensed, NRU).
  • NRU new radio unlicensed
  • the shared frequency band in addition to the current new radio (NR) system, it also includes other access systems such as radar (radar), wireless fidelity (WIFI), Bluetooth and other different operators. Therefore, regulations stipulate that systems operating in shared frequency bands need to support all or some of the following key technologies, namely, listen before talk (LBT), transmit power control (TPC) and dynamic spectrum selection (dynamic spectrum selection). frequency selection, DFS).
  • the LBT mechanism means that various access devices must first obtain the interference situation on the frequency band where the target channel is located before using the channel. Only when the interference level on the target frequency band channel is less than or equal to the preset threshold value, the channel can be used. .
  • the TPC mechanism means that in order not to affect the normal communication of other access devices, a sending device working on a shared authorization cannot increase its own transmit power without limitation.
  • the DFS mechanism means that the system working on the shared license needs to avoid the frequency band where the high-priority system is located in time, and dynamically switch to the frequency band with lower interference to work.
  • the initial access process will be entered before the user equipment and the base station establish communication.
  • the UE first demodulates the synchronization signal/physical broadcast
  • the channel block (synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block, SS/PBCH block or SSB or SSB index or SS/PBCH block index) acquires important information for initial access.
  • SSB is mainly composed of primary synchronization signal (PSS), secondary synchronization signal (SSS) and physical broadcast channel (PBCH).
  • PSS primary synchronization signal
  • SSS secondary synchronization signal
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • the two-dimensional area occupies 20 resource blocks (RBs) in the frequency domain.
  • the maximum number of transmitted SSBs allowed by the communication system is related to the frequency band in which the current system is located.
  • FDD frequency-division duplex
  • the maximum number of SSBs sent by the gNB is 4;
  • time-division duplex In a mode (time-division duplex, TDD) system when the UE and the gNB work in a frequency band less than or equal to 2.3 GHz, the maximum number of SSBs sent by the gNB is 4.
  • the UE obtains the candidate SSB position by demodulating the demodulation reference signal (DMRS) sequence (the DMRS sequence occupies 3-bits) mapped to the 3-bit (bits) in the PBCH in the SSB.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the maximum number of SSBs sent by the gNB is 8;
  • the TDD system when the UE and the gNB operate in the frequency band greater than 2.3GHz and less than 6GHz
  • the maximum number of SSBs sent by the gNB is 8, and the UE obtains the candidate SSB positions by demodulating the 3-bit DMRS sequence in the SSB.
  • the maximum number of SSBs that can be sent by the gNB is 64. represents) and represents the DMRS sequence of 3-bits, representing a total of 6-bits.
  • the system introduces the concept of a group, that is, the parameter "ssb-PositionsInBurst" includes “groupPresence” and "inOneGroup”.
  • the parameter "groupPresence” indicates a group of consecutive SSBs
  • the parameter "inOneGroup” indicates the actual SSB position sent in the group "groupPresence”
  • the SSN patterns (SSBpatterns) in different groups are the same.
  • DMRS sequence corresponds to the last three bits in "000000”.
  • "000000” indicates the candidate SSB position demodulated by the UE is #0, and the corresponding group position is #0; when the UE demodulates the , it indicates that the candidate SSB position demodulated by the UE is #7, and the corresponding group position is #0; , it indicates that the candidate SSB position demodulated by the UE is #15, and the corresponding group position is #1.
  • FIG. 2 An example diagram of SSB sending is shown in Fig. 2 . From Figure 2, it can be found that, for the network device, the position of the parameter "groupPresence” with the value of "1" indicates the group containing the SSB to be sent; the position of the parameter "inOneGroup” with the value of "1” indicates the The position of the SSB to be sent in each group, and the SSB pattern sent in each group is the same, that is, "10101011".
  • the position of the parameter "groupPresence” with the value of "1” indicates the group containing the SSB that actually needs to be received; the position of the parameter "inOneGroup” with the value of "1” indicates the The actual SSB location that needs to be received, the received SSB pattern in each group is the same, that is, "10101011".
  • the parameter "ssb-PositionsInBurst" is included in the system information block 1 (system information block1, SIB1).
  • SIB1 system information block1
  • the gNB when it transmits data to the UE through the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)/physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), the allocated time-frequency domain resources will be avoided. Time-frequency domain resources occupied by the sending SSB.
  • the UE after passing the demodulation parameter "ssb-PositionsInBurst", it believes that there is no scheduled PDCCH/PDSCH resource on the time-frequency domain resources for sending SSB, which is the rate matching that we often understand. RM).
  • the NRU system of Rel-16 defines the burst set signal/discovery reference signal (DRS) window and candidate SSB respectively. position(candidate SSB index/position, )the concept of.
  • the duration of the DRS window may be ⁇ 0.5ms, 1ms, 2ms, 3ms, 4ms, 5ms ⁇ .
  • SS burst set For the UE, by default a set of SSBs (SS burst set) are sent within the DRS window.
  • the main working frequency band of the NRU system of Rel-16 is below 6GHz, and the maximum number of SSBs it can support is 8.
  • the network device when communicating on the shared frequency band, for the same SSB, can send the SSB in the direction of one or more downlink transmit beams with an associated relationship, so as to improve the access success rate of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines different SSB positions through a parameter indicating the SSB position, and determines the association relationship between different SSB positions through the association parameter between the SSB positions.
  • the system introduces the concept of quasi co-location (QCL), through the formula or express, represents the sequence of DMRS in SSB mapped to PBCH, is the Q value, occupies 2-bits, and takes the value ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8 ⁇ .
  • QCL quasi co-location
  • the UE obtains by demodulating the master information block (MIB) When candidate SSB location The actual SSB position on (l) satisfies the formula or When , the gNB will be in the candidate position that satisfies the formula send the same SSB position (l) on the For the UE, it corresponds to the same SSB position, and the UE can use the same downlink receive beam to receive the SSB position (1) that satisfies the formula.
  • MIB master information block
  • FIG. 3 A schematic diagram of candidate SSBs with a QCL relationship (QCLed) within 5 ms is shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the length of the DRS window is 5ms
  • #0 to #19 in the first row represent candidate SSB positions
  • the candidate SSB positions with the same pattern are the candidate SSB positions of QCLed.
  • candidate SSB position #0, candidate SSB position #4, candidate SSB position #8, candidate SSB position #12, and candidate SSB position #16 with the same pattern are QCLed candidate SSB positions; another example, candidate SSB positions with the same pattern #3, candidate SSB position #7, candidate SSB position #11, candidate SSB position #15, and candidate SSB position #19 are the candidate SSB positions of QCLed.
  • the same downlink receive beam can be used to receive SSBs with the same pattern from different candidate positions.
  • FIG. 4 For the example of FIG. 2 , when LBT is introduced, its example diagram is shown in FIG. 4 .
  • Figure 4 when LBT is successful at candidate SSB position #21 in the first group, that is, SSB positions #1 to #5 cannot be sent due to LBT failure, if the round-robin method in the Rel-16NRU system is used, group # The parameter "inOneGroup” in 1 becomes "11101010", and the parameter "inOneGroup” in other groups may also be about to change.
  • the network device when the network device sends a large number of SSBs and needs to send SSBs in the form of SSB groups, for example, when the number of SSBs sent is 64, the parameter "inOneGroup" in each group will change, so that the UE Unable to do proper rate matching.
  • the association parameter since the association parameter only indicates the association relationship between different SSB positions, it is easy to cause the terminal device to fail to demodulate the SSB, increase the access delay of the terminal device, and affect the communication efficiency.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and related equipment, which are used to improve the success rate of terminal equipment to demodulate SSB, and shorten the access delay of the terminal equipment's initial access during the initial access process. , which improves the reliability of initial access and improves communication efficiency.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including the following steps.
  • the network device determines the SSB group positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks.
  • the network device determines a plurality of candidate SSB group positions in step S101, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship.
  • At least two candidate SSB positions have the association relationship
  • at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship
  • the at least two candidate SSB positions are respectively located in different candidate SSB groups among the at least two candidate SSB group positions.
  • the candidate SSB group includes one or more candidate SSBs, and each candidate SSB is used to indicate an opportunity for the network device to send an SSB.
  • the SSB is sent on the resource corresponding to the SSB.
  • the SSB may be received based on the candidate SSB.
  • candidate SSBs may also be referred to as “candidate SSB positions", or “candidate SSB indices", or “candidate positions”;
  • candidate SSB groups may also be referred to as “candidate SSB group positions", or “candidate SSB positions” group index", or “candidate group position”.
  • the "candidate SSB group position" and the "candidate SSB position” will be described as examples.
  • the network device before sending the SSB in step S104, the network device first determines, in step S101, multiple candidate SSB group positions where the SSB to be sent is located, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship .
  • the association relationship may specifically include a quasi co-location (QCL) relationship.
  • the network device may determine multiple candidate SSBs in step S101 according to network parameters such as the frequency band of the current communication, the channel occupancy ratio (CR) of the current communication, and the channel busy ratio (CBR), etc. Group location; the network device may also determine multiple candidate SSB group locations in step S101 according to prefabricated configuration information, core network device or other network device indication information, or determine by other means, which is not limited here.
  • network parameters such as the frequency band of the current communication, the channel occupancy ratio (CR) of the current communication, and the channel busy ratio (CBR), etc. Group location
  • the network device may also determine multiple candidate SSB group locations in step S101 according to prefabricated configuration information, core network device or other network device indication information, or determine by other means, which is not limited here.
  • the network device determines the positions of multiple candidate SSB groups and expresses them by the parameter "groupPresence".
  • the value of the parameter "groupPresence” is "10101011”
  • the value of "1" in the parameter "groupPresence” indicates the position
  • the group containing the SSB needs to be sent, that is, the SSB needs to be sent in the candidate SSB group.
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device in step S102, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positions of the multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups determined in step S101.
  • the terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device in step S102.
  • the network device indicates to the terminal device to send the SSB to the terminal device at the candidate SSB group position whose group position is 0, 2, 4, 6 or 7. Accordingly, the terminal can receive the SSB at the above-mentioned position.
  • the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  • the first indication information may be expressed jointly by the physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or the bits corresponding to the DMRS sequence of the demodulation reference signal, that is, the first indication information may be expressed by the bits in the physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or the bits corresponding to the DMRS sequence of the demodulation reference signal. Or represents the bit realization of the demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence.
  • the total number of bits corresponding to the first indication information may be n, where n is 4, 5, or 7, or other values, such as 3, 6, 8, etc., and different values of n
  • the number of candidate SSB groups corresponding to the multiple candidate SSB group positions indicated by the first indication information may be different.
  • the first indication information can be represented by any 3-bits in the PBCH load of the physical broadcast channel, or the first indication information can also be represented by the 3-bits corresponding to the DMRS sequence, or It is expressed jointly by the physical broadcast channel PBCH load and the DMRS sequence.
  • the terminal device can determine the SSB group positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks according to the PBCH load and/or the different implementations of the demodulation reference signal DMRS contained in the first indication information. .
  • the following will describe the process for the terminal device to determine the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups according to different implementations of the first indication information through specific examples.
  • Z is used to represent the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups .
  • the representation of the candidate group position Z can be represented by at least one of the following manners:
  • the terminal device can determine that there are at most 16 candidate group positions (such as the value ⁇ 10, 11) within one DRS window (or one half frame or one SS burst set period). , 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 ⁇ one or more).
  • the implementation represented by 4-bits specifically includes any of the following:
  • any 2-bits can also include high-order 2-bits in the DMRS sequence or low-order 2-bits in the DMRS sequence;
  • any 1-bits can also include high-order bits 1 in the DMRS sequence -bits or low-order 1-bits in the DMRS sequence.
  • the terminal device can determine that there are at most 32 candidate group positions (such as values ⁇ 17-31) within one DRS window (or one half frame or one SS burst set period). , including one or more of 20 ⁇ ).
  • the implementation represented by 5-bits specifically includes any of the following:
  • any 2-bits can also include high-order 2-bits in the DMRS sequence or low-order 2-bits in the DMRS sequence;
  • any 1-bits can also include high-order bits 1 in the DMRS sequence -bits or low-order 1-bits in the DMRS sequence.
  • the terminal device can also obtain the first indication information implicitly through the configuration parameter indicating the position of the candidate SSB, that is, the first indication information can be realized by the configuration parameter indicating the position of the candidate SSB.
  • the candidate SSB position can be passed through " + Indicates 3-bits in the DMRS sequence", a total of 7-bits are represented.
  • the terminal device can pass the candidate SSB location
  • the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device.
  • the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device in step S103, where the second indication information is used to determine at least two of the multiple candidate SSB group positions indicated by the first indication information in step S102, at least two The association relationship of each candidate SSB group position.
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device in step S103.
  • the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group positions may exist in multiple implementation manners.
  • the second indication Information can be passed through different parameters to determine multiple implementations of the association.
  • the second indication information may be used to indicate the first candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position and/or, when at least two candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, the second indication information may be used to indicate the third candidate SSB group position.
  • the second indication information used to determine the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group positions among the multiple candidate SSB group positions may be implemented in various manners.
  • the second indication information may specifically indicate the association relationship between different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions, and/or the second indication information may specifically indicate that the different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions The relationship between the included at least one candidate SSB location.
  • the terminal device may use corresponding implementation manners in different implementation scenarios, and determine the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions according to the second indication information.
  • the terminal device may not perform step S103 to receive the second indication information from the network device, but obtain the second indication information in other ways, for example, by reading in a storage module pre-stored in the terminal device Obtaining the second indication information, or obtaining the second indication information by the terminal device receiving information of other terminal devices in the sidelink communication, may also be other implementation manners, which are not limited here.
  • the terminal device may determine the association relationship according to the second indication information. Specifically, the terminal device can determine, according to the second indication information from the network device, the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group positions among the multiple candidate SSB group positions, that is, the terminal device can determine the association relationship according to the indication of the network device. , so that the terminal device can align the configuration of the association relationship with the network device.
  • the terminal device may also determine the association relationship according to the second indication information and the third indication information, wherein the third indication information includes the positions of the multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB group (ie the first indication information), Multiple candidate SSB locations, multiple SSB group locations, and/or number of SSBs. Specifically, the terminal device may further determine the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group positions among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the second indication information and the third indication information, wherein the third indication information may be specifically included in the Multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions (ie, first indication information), multiple candidate SSB positions, multiple SSB group positions and/or SSB numbers in one or more listening windows.
  • the third indication information includes the positions of the multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB group (ie the first indication information), Multiple candidate SSB locations, multiple SSB group locations, and/or number of SSBs.
  • the terminal device uses the third indication information and the second indication information to jointly determine in the process of determining the association relationship, it is possible to optimize the The process of determining the relationship.
  • the number of bits corresponding to the second indication information may be m, where m is 2 or 3, or other values, such as 1, 4, 5, etc., and different values of m may correspond to Different implementations of the association relationship indicated by the second indication information.
  • the implementation manner of the second indication information can be represented by at least one of the following manners:
  • the second indication information can be managed by the radio resource (radio resource control, RRC) signaling configuration, which is represented by 2-bits in MIB parameters, and its representation method is one of the following:
  • control resource set zero controlResourceSetZero such as high bits of 2-bits or low bits of 2-bits or any 2-bits
  • Control Resource Set Zero controlResourceSetZero and "Search Space Zero searchSpaceZero" each take 1-bit, a total of 2-bits
  • the 1-bit obtained in each parameter can be a high-order bit or a low-order bit. , or any 1-bit.
  • subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
  • ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
  • pdcch-ConfigSIB1 including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
  • controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
  • searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
  • the SSB position (1) used to indicate the cyclic shift (cyclically shift) is jointly indicated by the parameter "groupPresence” and the parameter "inOneGroup", that is, the second indication information is configured through RRC signaling, and is passed through the MIB parameter.
  • the 2-bits representation of which is represented by one of the following methods:
  • control resource set zero controlResourceSetZero such as high bits of 2-bits or low bits of 2-bits or any 2-bits
  • Control Resource Set Zero controlResourceSetZero and "Search Space Zero searchSpaceZero" each take 1-bit, a total of 2-bits
  • the 1-bit obtained in each parameter can be a high-order bit or a low-order bit. , or any 1-bit.
  • subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
  • ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
  • pdcch-ConfigSIB1 including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
  • controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
  • searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
  • the Q1 value two sets are respectively represented: ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8 ⁇ and ⁇ 8, 16, 24, 64 ⁇ .
  • the set of Q1 is implicitly obtained when searching for the SSB position through the synchronization fence (sync raster) located on different frequency points.
  • the value of Q1 is ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8 ⁇ ;
  • the value of Q1 is ⁇ 8, 16, 24, 64 ⁇ , as shown in Table 1 below (indicating the relationship between Q1 values and frequency points).
  • Frequency Q1 value Less than or equal to 7GHz (or less than or equal to 6GHz) ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8 ⁇ Greater than 7GHz (or greater than 6GHz) ⁇ 8, 16, 24, 64 ⁇
  • Q 1 as ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ⁇ .
  • the SSB positions used to indicate the cyclic shift that is, different SSBs and their group positions, have a QCL relationship at the candidate SSB positions or the candidate group positions that satisfy the formula, that is, the second indication information is transmitted through the RRC signal.
  • the command configuration is represented by 3-bits in the MIB parameter, and its representation method is one of the following:
  • control resource set zero controlResourceSetZero any 2-bits
  • search space zero searchSpaceZero any 1-bit
  • controlResourceSetZero and “searchSpaceZero” are both located in "pdcch-ConfigSIB1".
  • Any 1-bit also includes the high-order 1-bit or low-order 1-bit in the parameters "ssb-SubcarrierOffset", "controlResourceSetZero” or “searchSpaceZero”;
  • Any 2-bits also includes the parameter “controlResourceSetZero” Or high-order 2-bits or low-order 2-bits in “searchSpaceZero”;
  • any 3-bits also includes high-order 3-bits or low-order 3-bits in parameter "controlResourceSetZero” or “searchSpaceZero” bits.
  • subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
  • ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
  • pdcch-ConfigSIB1 including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
  • controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
  • searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
  • different values of the above-mentioned second indication information can correspond to different values of Q 1 , for example, the value of Q 1 represented by "000” is “1", and the value of Q 1 represented by "001” is “2"",And so on.
  • the value is related to the number of SSB positions sent by the network device, such as "ssb-PositionsInBurst" in the parameter "ServingCellConfigCommon". Within a segment (such as a 5ms half-frame or an SS burst set), only 4 SSBs can be sent at most.
  • the parameter configured in "ssb-PositionsInBurst" is “mediumBitmap"
  • the network device is in a period of time (such as 5ms half frame or an SS burst set), only a maximum of 8 SSBs can be sent.
  • an implementation method is that the parameter "groupPresence" of "ssb-PositionsInBurst" in the parameter "ServingCellConfigCommonSIB” can be configured to "10000000", that is, only one SSB in a group can be sent out.
  • Q 1 Indicates that it is used to calculate the SSB positions with QCL relationship, and the number of SSB positions is not more than 8.
  • parameter configured in “ssb-PositionsInBurst” is “longBitmap"
  • the network device can only send a maximum of 64 SSBs within a time period (such as a 5ms half frame or an SS burst set).
  • the number of the parameter "groupPresence” value "1" in “ssb-PositionsInBurst” in the parameter "ServingCellConfigCommonSIB” is greater than 1.
  • the representation of parameter Q 1 has the following three meanings:
  • ii) ⁇ 16, 32, 64 ⁇ indicates that it is used to calculate and obtain SSB positions with QCL relationship on different candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions;
  • iii) ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ⁇ represents the SSB positions used to calculate and obtain different candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions with a QCL relationship.
  • Q 3 is the low-order 3-bits or high-order 3-bits in Q 1
  • Y is the PBCH payload.
  • a total of 6-bits represents the value.
  • the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups in the third indication information are represented by Z
  • the number of SSBs in the third indication information is represented by Indicates that multiple SSB group positions (or multiple SSB group positions) in the third indication information are represented by X.
  • the formula can be Or (Y mod Q 4 ) to obtain the SSB position that satisfies the QCL relationship, and Y is passed through the PBCH payload
  • a total of 6-bits represents the value
  • Q 4 is the three bits of Q 1 representing ⁇ 16, 32, 64 ⁇ , the value is ⁇ 16, 32, 64 ⁇ , such as low-order bits 3-bits or high-order 3-bits; or Q 4 is Q 1 .
  • the network device sends the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship.
  • the terminal device detects the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
  • step S104 the network device sends the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship.
  • step S105 the terminal device may detect the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information received in step S102 and the association relationship between the positions of the at least two candidate SSB groups.
  • step S105 for the association relationship used by the terminal device in step S105, it can be seen from the description of step S103 that the terminal device can obtain the second indication information in various ways, and determine at least two indications through the second indication information.
  • the association relationship of each candidate SSB group position is not limited to the acquisition method in step S103 .
  • an implementation manner in which the terminal device obtains the second indication information through step S103 is used as an example for description.
  • step S104 there may be multiple implementation manners for the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions.
  • the implementation sends the SSB.
  • the process that the network device sends the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship may include: the network device performs LBT before the first candidate SSB group position; if the LBT fails, then The network device sends the SSB at the second candidate group SSB location. The network device needs to perform LBT before sending the SSB.
  • the network device fails to perform LBT at the first candidate SSB group position, the network device is at the second candidate SSB group position that has the association relationship with the first candidate SSB group position. SSBs are sent so that SSBs not sent at the first candidate SSB group position due to LBT failure are sent at the second candidate SSB group position.
  • the network device when the multiple candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, wherein the third candidate SSB group position includes the first candidate SSB position, and the fourth candidate SSB group position includes the second candidate SSB group position.
  • the candidate SSB position, and the third candidate SSB group position and the fourth candidate SSB group position have the association relationship, and the first SSB position and the second SSB position have the association relationship
  • the network device according to The process of sending the SSB in at least one candidate SSB group position of the plurality of candidate SSB group positions in the association relationship may include: the network device performs LBT at the first candidate SSB position; if the LBT fails, the network device performs LBT at the first candidate SSB group position; Two candidate SSB locations send the SSB.
  • the network device needs to perform LBT before sending the SSB. If the network device fails to perform LBT at the first candidate SSB position in the third candidate SSB group position, the network device has the association relationship with the third candidate SSB group position. In the fourth candidate SSB group position, the second candidate SSB position that has the association relationship with the first candidate SSB position sends the SSB, so that the SSB that is not sent at the first candidate SSB position due to the LBT failure is sent at the second candidate SSB position. .
  • step S104 The sending manner of the network device in step S104 will be described below by using a specific example.
  • Mode 1 The SSB pattern actually sent in the SSB group where the LBT succeeds does not change.
  • candidate SSB groups will appear in a cyclic shift at candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions within one or across (multiple) DRS windows, and the actually transmitted SSB positions within each group position (ie, Although the parameter "inOneGroup”) will also follow the cyclic shift of the group in which it belongs, it also has a QCL relationship, but the SSB pattern in each group position, the method and order of network device transmission, etc. remain unchanged, that is, the parameter " The SSB pattern in inOneGroup" remains unchanged.
  • the previous candidate group positions send all the SSB positions in the group at the candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions that satisfy the QCL relationship, that is, the sent group position (X) is cyclically shifted on the candidate group position (Z). Appear. From the UE's point of view, it monitors the SSB positions within the group at the candidate group positions satisfying the QCL relationship, or detects the SSB positions at the candidate SSB positions satisfying the QCL relationship.
  • the group position (X) it sends will appear in a cyclic shift.
  • the gNB is in a certain group position (Z)
  • the SSB position in the candidate group position will not be sent, but the SSB position will be sent at the candidate group position or the candidate SSB position that satisfies the QCL relationship. From the UE's point of view, it monitors the SSB positions within the group at the candidate group positions satisfying the QCL relationship, or detects the SSB positions at the candidate SSB positions satisfying the QCL relationship.
  • FIG. 6 the contents of the various blocks shown in FIG. 6 will be described first. Assuming that a DRS window (or a half-frame or a SS burst set period) is 5ms, within the 5ms listening window, the network device is in the shaded block #0 ⁇ Send SSB on #19.
  • the SSB positions of 0-7 can be shown as bold dashed boxes in FIG. 6 .
  • the maximum number of SSBs sent by the network device in the 5ms window is 64 as an example, that is, there may be two or three identical blank boxes #0 ⁇ #7, for example, in Figure There are three identical blank boxes #0, #1, #2, #3 in the display, and two identical blank boxes #4, #5, #6, #7.
  • the same blank box indicates that the transmitted SSB positions are the same, for example, the SSB positions carried by the SSB positions corresponding to the dotted boxes #0-7, #64-71, and #128-135 corresponding to the blank box #0 are the same; , the SSBs carried by the SSB positions corresponding to the dotted boxes #40-47 and #104-111 corresponding to the blank box #5 are the same.
  • step S104 When the network device performs step S104 in the manner of FIG. 6 , it is assumed that the candidate group position #0 and the candidate group position #8, and the candidate group position #2 and the candidate group position #10 satisfy a certain QCL relationship.
  • LBT occurs in candidate group position #2, SSBs in ⁇ candidate SSB position #16 ⁇ candidate SSB position #23 ⁇ in this candidate group position will not be sent, but in the candidate group position that satisfies the QCL relationship ( For example, on candidate group position #10), all SSB positions within group position #2 on candidate group position #2 are sent.
  • the SSB positions configured as "1" in the parameter "inOneGroup” are sent in the candidate SSB positions ⁇ candidate SSB position #80 to candidate SSB position #87 ⁇ .
  • it will send the SSB on the candidate SSB position on candidate SSB position #8 that satisfies the QCL relationship, or the SSB position on the candidate SSB position that satisfies the QCL relationship .
  • the SSB positions in the other group positions are sent at the candidate group position or the candidate SSB position.
  • the terminal device can detect, in step S105, the first indication information received by the network device and the second indication information received by the step S103.
  • SSB For the UE, within one or across DRS window(s), SSB locations within a group location with a QCL relationship have a QCL relationship. At the same time, within a DRS window, the number of groups actually sent in a serving cell will not be greater than Q 1 , and the number of SSBs (l) actually sent will be no greater than Q 2 , and include groups with the same SSB position (l). The number of and the number with the same SSB position (l) is neither greater than 1.
  • a number of transmitted group index on a serving cell is not larger than Q 1 and a number of transmitted group index contains the same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one, a number of transmitted SS/PBCH block index on a serving cell is not larger than Q 2 and a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks with a same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one.
  • the terminal device may detect the SSB correspondingly according to the different association relationships determined by the second indication information in step S105, which will be described in detail below.
  • step S103 determines in step S103 that the second indication information corresponds to the value ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8 ⁇ of the Q 1 value.
  • the candidate group position of either (X mod Q 1 ) or (Z mod Q 1 ) or the group position on the candidate SSB position has a QCL relationship, and the SSB position (1) sent in the group position is the same, and the UE is in the candidate group that satisfies the formula.
  • SSBs are detected at group positions or candidate SSB positions.
  • step S103 determines in step S103 that the second indication information corresponds to the value ⁇ 8, 16, 24, 64 ⁇ of the Q 1 value.
  • the SSB positions (l) with QCL relationship satisfy the formula Or (Y mod Q 1 ) calculation to obtain.
  • the number of SSBs in the third indication information passes through Indicates that multiple SSB positions in the third indication information are represented by Y.
  • Y can be passed through the PBCH payload And the DMRS sequence of 3-bits, a total of 6-bits represents the value.
  • the terminal device and the network device can use the formula or (X mod Q 2 ) or (Z mod Q 2 ), where Wherein, the multiple SSB group positions (or multiple group positions) in the third indication information are represented by X, and X can be represented by one of the following two or a combination:
  • the same downlink receive beam can be used to receive at different candidate SSB positions satisfy the formula or the SSB position of (Y mod Q 1 ).
  • step S103 determines in step S103 that the second indication information corresponds to the value ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ⁇ of the Q 1 value.
  • gNB and UE pass the formula Or (X mod Q 3 ) or (Z mod Q 3 ) to obtain the group position that satisfies the QCL relationship, Q 3 is the low-order 3-bits or high-order 3-bits in Q 1 , and Y is the PBCH payload. of And the DMRS sequence of 3-bits, a total of 6-bits represents the value. Z is the candidate group position and X is the group position.
  • gNB and UE pass the formula Or (Y mod Q 4 ) to obtain the SSB position that satisfies the QCL relationship, and Y is passed through the PBCH payload
  • Y is passed through the PBCH payload
  • a total of 6-bits represents the value
  • Q 4 is the three bits of Q 1 representing ⁇ 16, 32, 64 ⁇ , the value is ⁇ 16, 32, 64 ⁇ , such as low-order bits 3-bits or high-order 3-bits; or Q 4 is Q 1 .
  • the same downlink receive beam can be used to receive at different candidate SSB positions satisfy the formula or the SSB position of (Y mod Q 4 ).
  • the concept of a group with a QCL relationship is introduced, and the UE can accurately obtain the actual SSB sending position according to the group-based QCL relationship, so as to facilitate rate matching.
  • Mode 2 The SSB group in which the LBT succeeds is located, and the SSB pattern actually sent in other SSB groups changes.
  • candidate SSB group positions will appear in a cyclic shift at candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions within one or across (multiple) DRS windows, and the actually transmitted SSB positions in each group position ( That is, the parameter "inOneGroup”) will also follow the cyclic shift of the group position, and it also has a QCL relationship.
  • the SSB pattern in each group position or the transmission method of the network device will also change accordingly. That is, the group position (parameter "GroupPresence”) and the actually sent SSB position (parameter "InOneGroup”) in the group position are cyclically shifted at the same time.
  • the SSB before the group where the LBT succeeds - from the gNB point of view if there is an SSB position that needs to be sent on other candidate group positions before the candidate group position (for example, the parameter "GroupPresence" is set to "1"), then the previous These candidate group positions are in the selected group positions or candidate SSB positions that satisfy the QCL relationship All the SSB positions in the group are sent out, that is, the sent group position (X) appears in the form of cyclic shift on the candidate group position (Z).
  • the group position sent by it will be in multiple candidate group positions or candidate SSBs in a cyclic shift manner appear in the position, the group positions sent at these candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions are the same, that is, the QCL relationship is satisfied.
  • the actually sent SSB position in each group position will be based on the actual sending situation and change of the SSB at the candidate group position where the LBT is located.
  • the number of group positions sent by the gNB is greater than the number of bits set to "1" in the parameter "GroupPresence".
  • the gNB sends the same group at different candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions according to the QCL relationship.
  • the position needs to be at least twice, that is, at the candidate group positions of #2 and #10 in FIG. 7 , the SSB position within the group position of #2 can be sent.
  • the actually transmitted SSB position in the group position on each candidate group position will also appear when the group position where the group position is located is located in other multiple candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions.
  • the gNB successfully occupies the channel by LBT in a candidate group position
  • the SSB position after the successful LBT in the candidate group position will be sent, but the SSB position in the group position before the time point when the LBT is successful will be in It is sent at the candidate group position or the candidate SSB position that satisfies the QCL relationship.
  • the actually transmitted SSB position pattern, the number of indices and the relative positions of the SSB positions within each group position remain unchanged.
  • step S104 the LBT occurs in the candidate group position #2, and the SSB positions in the candidate SSB position #0 to the candidate SSB position #5 in the group position cannot be successfully sent out due to the LBT failure. , the SSBs at candidate SSB position #6 and candidate SSB position #7 can be successfully sent.
  • candidate group position #10, candidate group position #12, candidate group position #14 and candidate group position #15 ⁇ that satisfy the QCL relationship, because the same as ⁇ candidate group position #0, candidate group position #15 ⁇ #2, candidate group position #4, candidate group position #6 and candidate group position #7 ⁇ correspond to the same group position, so ⁇ candidate group position #8, candidate group position #10, candidate group position #12, candidate group position #12 Position #14 and candidate group position #15 ⁇
  • the SSB positions sent within the group are respectively ( ⁇ candidate SSB position #64, candidate SSB position #66, candidate SSB position #68, candidate SSB position #70, candidate SSB position #71 ⁇ , ⁇ candidate SSB location #80, candidate SSB location #82, candidate SSB location #84 ⁇ , ⁇ candidate SSB location #96, candidate SSB location #98, candidate SSB location #100 ⁇ , ⁇ candidate SSB location #112, candidate SSB
  • the process shown in FIG. 7 can be simply summarized as: for the actually transmitted SSB location within each group location.
  • the network device On the first 8 candidate group positions, the network device will only transmit the SSB positions on the last two candidate SSB positions on the candidate group positions.
  • the gNB transmits the remaining SSB positions over the other candidate SSB positions in each group position.
  • the terminal device may detect, in step S105, the first indication information received by the network device and the second indication information received by the step S103.
  • SSB Specifically, for the UE, within one or across DRS window(s), SSB locations within a group location with a QCL relationship have a QCL relationship. Meanwhile, within a DRS window, the number of groups actually sent in one serving cell may be greater than Q 1 , and the number of groups containing the same SSB position (1) may be greater than 1, and the number of actually sent SSBs (1) will be is not greater than Q2 , and the number of identical SSB locations (1) actually transmitted within a group location is not greater than 1.
  • a number of transmitted group index on a serving cell can be larger than, and a number of transmitted group index provided by is “GroupPresence” can be larger than one, a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks on a serving cell is not larger than, and a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks with a same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one.
  • the terminal device may detect the SSB correspondingly according to the different association relationships determined by the second indication information. Specifically, in step S103, the terminal device determines the value ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8 ⁇ of the Q 1 value corresponding to the second indication information, or determines the value ⁇ 8, 16 of the Q 1 value corresponding to the second indication information , 24, 64 ⁇ , or the implementation of determining the value ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ⁇ of the second indication information corresponding to the Q 1 value may refer to the implementation process in the foregoing method 1. Repeat.
  • Mode 3 The SSB pattern actually sent in the SSB group where the LBT succeeds is changed.
  • the group positions will appear in a cyclic shift at candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions within one or across (multiple) DRS windows, and the actually transmitted SSB positions (i.e. parameter "inOneGroup") also follows the cyclic shift of the group position, and also has a QCL relationship.
  • the SSB pattern in the candidate group position where the LBT succeeds or the way the network device sends it will also change accordingly.
  • the SSB before the group where the LBT succeeds - from the gNB point of view if there is an SSB position that needs to be sent on other candidate group positions before the candidate group position (for example, the parameter "GroupPresence" is set to "1"), then the previous These candidate group positions are in the selected group positions or candidate SSB positions that satisfy the QCL relationship All the SSB positions in the group are sent out, that is, the sent group position (X) appears in the form of cyclic shift on the candidate group position (Z). From the UE's point of view, it monitors the SSB positions within the group at the candidate group positions satisfying the QCL relationship, or detects the SSB positions at the candidate SSB positions satisfying the QCL relationship.
  • the gNB For the SSB of the group where the LBT is successful - for the LBT success that occurs in a candidate group position, in the group position on the candidate group position, if there is an SSB position before the LBT is successful, it needs to be sent (for example, the parameter "InOneGroup” is set to " 1"), the gNB sends the SSB position on the candidate group position that satisfies the QCL relationship, or sends the SSB position on the candidate SSB position; and in the group position on the candidate group position, after the LBT succeeds, if there is an SSB position, it needs to send ( For example, the parameter "InOneGroup” is set to "1"), the gNB will send the SSB position at the candidate SSB position on the candidate group position.
  • the UE From the UE's point of view, it monitors the SSB positions within the group at the candidate group positions satisfying the QCL relationship, or detects the SSB positions at the candidate SSB positions satisfying the QCL relationship.
  • the actually transmitted SSB position pattern, the number of indices and the relative positions of the SSB positions within each group position remain unchanged.
  • FIG. 8 for the content shown in various blocks in FIG. 8, reference may be made to the description of the content shown in the various blocks in FIG. 6, which will not be repeated here.
  • LBT occurs at candidate group position #2, and there are also SSB positions within candidate group position #0 that need to be sent.
  • the candidate SSB position of the gNB at the candidate group position #8 SSBs with either the SSB position within the same group position or the same SSB position (1) are sent.
  • the network device For SSB locations within candidate set location #2, the network device transmits the SSB locations on candidate SSB location #22 and candidate SSB location #23.
  • the SSB position is sent on the candidate SSB position #84 ⁇ .
  • the SSB pattern or transmission order of the candidate SSB positions in the remaining candidate groups will not be changed.
  • the process shown in FIG. 8 can be simply summarized as: only the SSB position actually sent in the group where the LBT is successful is changed, and the sending mode of the SSB position in other group positions will not change.
  • the terminal device can detect the data sent by the network device according to the first indication information received in step S102 and the second indication information received in step S103 in step S105 .
  • SSB Specifically, for the UE, within one or across DRS window(s), SSB locations within a group location with a QCL relationship have a QCL relationship.
  • the number of groups actually sent in one serving cell may be greater than Q 1 , and the number of groups containing the same SSB position (1) may be greater than 1, and the number of actually sent SSBs (1) will be is not greater than Q2 , and the number of identical SSB locations (1) actually transmitted within a group location is not greater than 1.
  • a number of transmitted group on a serving cell can be larger than Q 1 , and a number of transmitted groups with a same group index provided by “GroupPresence” can be larger than one, a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks on a serving cell is not larger than Q 2 ,and a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks with a same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one.
  • the terminal device may detect the SSB correspondingly according to the different association relationships determined by the second indication information. Specifically, in step S103, the terminal device determines the value ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8 ⁇ of the Q 1 value corresponding to the second indication information, or determines the value ⁇ 8, 16 of the Q 1 value corresponding to the second indication information , 24, 64 ⁇ , or the implementation of determining the value ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ⁇ of the second indication information corresponding to the Q 1 value may refer to the implementation process in the foregoing method 1. Repeat.
  • the concept of a group with a QCL relationship is introduced, wherein the SSB position sent at the candidate group position where the LBT succeeds is sent at different candidate group positions according to the LBT result.
  • the sending position of the actual SSB position can be accurately obtained, so as to facilitate rate matching.
  • the network device first determines multiple candidate SSB group positions, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship;
  • the relationship transmits the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position of the plurality of candidate SSB group positions.
  • the network device sends the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship between different SSB groups, that is, the network device sends the SSB based on the association relationship, so that the terminal device can send the SSB according to the association relationship.
  • the association relationship monitors the SSB sent by the network device, which can improve the success rate of the terminal device to demodulate the SSB. In the initial access process, the access delay of the initial access of the terminal device is shortened, and the reliability of the initial access is improved. , so as to improve the communication efficiency.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device 900, the communication device 900 includes a transceiver unit 901 and a processing unit 902;
  • the transceiver unit 901 is configured to receive first indication information from a network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions Group positions are associated;
  • the processing unit 902 is configured to detect the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
  • the part of the transceiver unit used to implement the receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the part of the transceiver unit used to implement the sending function may be regarded as a transceiver unit.
  • At least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are respectively located at different candidates in the at least two candidate SSB group positions SSB group.
  • the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
  • the transceiver unit 901 is further configured to receive second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship;
  • the processing unit 902 is further configured to determine the association relationship according to the second indication information.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to determine the association relationship according to the second indication information and third indication information, where the third indication information includes the first indication information, multiple candidate SSB positions, Multiple SSB group positions and/or number of SSBs.
  • the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first candidate SSB group position and the first candidate SSB group position There is this association between the two candidate SSB group positions;
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and the second candidate SSB group position in the third candidate SSB group positions At least one candidate SSB position in the SSB group position has the association relationship.
  • the second indication information includes any one of the following:
  • controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero are controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
  • controlResourceSetZero searchSpaceZero
  • searchSpaceZero controlResourceSetZero
  • subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
  • ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
  • pdcch-ConfigSIB1 including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
  • controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
  • searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
  • the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
  • the listening window includes a discovery reference signal DRS window, a half-frame duration, or a occupied duration of a synchronization signal burst set SS burst set.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device 1000, including a transceiver unit 1001 and a processing unit 1002;
  • the processing unit 1002 is configured to determine multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, and at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an associated relationship;
  • the transceiver unit 1001 is configured to send an SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the plurality of candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship.
  • the part of the transceiver unit used to implement the receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the part of the transceiver unit used to implement the sending function may be regarded as a transceiver unit.
  • At least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are respectively located at different candidates in the at least two candidate SSB group positions SSB group.
  • the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
  • the plurality of candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the first candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position have the association relation;
  • the transceiver unit 1001 is specifically used for:
  • the SSB is sent at the second candidate group SSB location.
  • the plurality of candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, wherein the third candidate SSB group position includes a first candidate SSB group position, the fourth candidate SSB group position The candidate SSB position includes a second candidate SSB position, and the third candidate SSB group position and the fourth candidate SSB group position have the association relationship, and the first SSB position and the second SSB position have the association relationship;
  • the transceiver unit 1001 is specifically used for:
  • the SSB is sent at the second candidate SSB location.
  • the transceiver unit 1001 is further configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups.
  • the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
  • the transceiver unit 1001 is further configured to send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship.
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a fifth candidate SSB group position and a sixth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the fifth candidate SSB group position and the sixth candidate SSB group position
  • the six candidate SSB group positions have this association relationship;
  • the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a seventh candidate SSB group position and an eighth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and the eighth candidate SSB group position in the seventh candidate SSB group positions At least one candidate SSB position in the SSB group position has the association relationship.
  • the second indication information includes any one of the following:
  • controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero are controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
  • controlResourceSetZero searchSpaceZero
  • searchSpaceZero controlResourceSetZero
  • subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
  • ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
  • pdcch-ConfigSIB1 including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
  • controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
  • searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
  • the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of the communication device involved in the above-mentioned embodiment provided for the embodiment of the present application, wherein the communication device may specifically be the network device in the foregoing embodiment, and the structure of the communication device may refer to FIG. 11 shows the structure.
  • the communication device includes at least one processor 1111 , at least one memory 1112 , at least one transceiver 1113 , at least one network interface 1114 and one or more antennas 1115 .
  • the processor 1111, the memory 1112, the transceiver 1113 and the network interface 1114 are connected, for example, through a bus. In this embodiment of the present application, the connection may include various interfaces, transmission lines, or buses, which are not limited in this embodiment. .
  • the antenna 1115 is connected to the transceiver 1113 .
  • the network interface 1114 is used to connect the communication device with other communication devices through a communication link.
  • the network interface 1114 may include a network interface between the communication device and the core network device, such as an S1 interface, and the network interface may include the communication device and other networks.
  • a network interface between devices such as other access network devices or core network devices, such as an X2 or Xn interface.
  • the processor 1111 is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs, for example, to support the communication device to perform the actions described in the embodiments.
  • the communication device may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data.
  • the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal equipment, execute software programs, and process data of software programs. .
  • the processor 1111 in FIG. 11 may integrate the functions of a baseband processor and a central processing unit. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, interconnected by technologies such as a bus.
  • a terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, a terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capability, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing the communication protocol and communication data may be built in the processor, or may be stored in the memory in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the memory 1112 may exist independently and be connected to the processor 1111 .
  • the memory 1112 may be integrated with the processor 1111, for example, in one chip.
  • the memory 1112 can store program codes for implementing the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and is controlled and executed by the processor 1111 .
  • Figure 11 shows only one memory and one processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and multiple memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like.
  • the memory may be a storage element on the same chip as the processor, that is, an on-chip storage element, or an independent storage element, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the transceiver 1113 may be used to support the reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between the communication device and the terminal, and the transceiver 1113 may be connected to the antenna 1115 .
  • the transceiver 1113 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx.
  • one or more antennas 1115 can receive radio frequency signals
  • the receiver Rx of the transceiver 1113 is used to receive the radio frequency signals from the antennas, convert the radio frequency signals into digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals, and convert the digital
  • the baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal is provided to the processor 1111, so that the processor 1111 performs further processing on the digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal, such as demodulation processing and decoding processing.
  • the transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1113 is also used to receive the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1111, and convert the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and pass a The radio frequency signal is transmitted by the antenna or antennas 1115.
  • the receiver Rx can selectively perform one or more stages of down-mixing processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the radio frequency signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal. The order of precedence is adjustable.
  • the transmitter Tx can selectively perform one or more stages of up-mixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a radio frequency signal, and the up-mixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing
  • the sequence of s is adjustable.
  • Digital baseband signals and digital intermediate frequency signals can be collectively referred to as digital signals.
  • a transceiver may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver, or the like.
  • the device used to implement the receiving function in the transceiver unit may be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the device used to implement the sending function in the transceiver unit may be regarded as a transceiver unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a transceiver unit, and the receiving unit also It can be called a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the transceiver unit can be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
  • the communication apparatus shown in FIG. 11 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the access network equipment in the method embodiments corresponding to FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 , and realize the technical effects corresponding to the access network equipment, as shown in FIG. 11 .
  • the specific implementation manner of the communication apparatus reference may be made to the descriptions in the respective method embodiments corresponding to FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 , which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a possible logical structure of the communication apparatus 1200 involved in the above-mentioned embodiments provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus may specifically be the terminal equipment in the foregoing embodiments. It may include, but is not limited to, a processor 1201 , a communication port 1202 , a memory 1203 , and a bus 1204 .
  • the processor 1201 is used to control and process the actions of the communication device 1200 .
  • the processor 1201 may be a central processing unit, a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It may implement or execute the various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with this disclosure.
  • the processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination comprising one or more microprocessors, a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, and the like.
  • the communication apparatus shown in FIG. 12 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the terminal equipment in the method embodiments corresponding to FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 , and realize the technical effects corresponding to the terminal equipment.
  • the descriptions in the respective method embodiments corresponding to FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 which will not be repeated here.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores one or more computer-executable instructions.
  • the processor executes the possible implementations of the communication device in the foregoing embodiments. method, wherein the communication device may specifically be the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores one or more computer-executable instructions.
  • the processor executes the possible implementations of the communication device in the foregoing embodiments. method, wherein the communication device may specifically be the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product (or computer program) that stores one or more computers.
  • the processor executes the method for possible implementations of the above communication device, wherein , the communication apparatus may specifically be the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product that stores one or more computers.
  • the processor executes the method for possible implementations of the above communication device, wherein the communication device may specifically be is the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, which is configured to support the communication apparatus to implement the functions involved in the possible implementation manners of the foregoing communication apparatus.
  • the chip system may further include a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the communication device.
  • the chip system may be constituted by a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices, wherein the communication device may specifically be the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, which is configured to support the communication apparatus to implement the functions involved in the possible implementation manners of the foregoing communication apparatus.
  • the chip system may further include a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the communication device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices, wherein the communication device may specifically be the terminal equipment in the foregoing embodiments.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a network system architecture, where the network system architecture includes the foregoing communication apparatus, and the communication apparatus may specifically be the terminal equipment and the network equipment in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, Read-Only Memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), Random Access Memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a communication method and a related device, which are used for improving the success rate of a terminal device demodulating an SSB. During an initial access process, the time of initial access by the terminal device is shortened, and the reliability of the initial access is improved, thereby improving the communication efficiency. The method involves: a terminal device receiving first indication information from a network device, wherein the first indication information is used for indicating a plurality of candidate synchronization signal block (SSB) group positions, and at least two of the plurality of candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship; and then, the terminal device detecting an SSB in a monitoring window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.

Description

一种通信方法及相关设备A communication method and related equipment 技术领域technical field
本申请涉及无线通信领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及相关设备。The present application relates to the field of wireless communication, and in particular, to a communication method and related equipment.
背景技术Background technique
在通信***中,终端设备和网络设备建立通信之前,终端设备需要解调来自网络设备的同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block,SS/PBCHblock或SSB)获取用于初始接入的重要信息,以接入该网络设备,其中,SSB也可以简称为同步信号块或初始接入信号。In a communication system, before a terminal device and a network device establish communication, the terminal device needs to demodulate the synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (SS/PBCHblock or SSB) from the network device to obtain it for initial connection In order to access the network device, SSB can also be referred to as a synchronization signal block or an initial access signal for short.
目前,针对同一个SSB,网络设备可以在具有关联关系的一个或多个下行发送波束方向上发送该SSB,以提升终端设备的接入成功率。其中,终端设备通过指示候选SSB位置的参数确定不同的候选SSB位置,并通过候选SSB位置之间的关联参数确定不同候选SSB位置之间的关联关系。其中,该关联关系一般通过3-比特(bits)的解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)序列进行指示,即该DMRS可以通过3-bits指示8个或8个以下的不同候选SSB位置之间的关联关系。Currently, for the same SSB, the network device may send the SSB in one or more downlink transmit beam directions with an associated relationship, so as to improve the access success rate of the terminal device. Wherein, the terminal device determines different candidate SSB positions through a parameter indicating the candidate SSB positions, and determines the association relationship between the different candidate SSB positions through the association parameter between the candidate SSB positions. Wherein, the association relationship is generally indicated by a 3-bit (bits) demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS) sequence, that is, the DMRS can indicate one of 8 or less different candidate SSB positions by 3-bits relationship between.
然而,当网络设备用于发送SSB的候选SSB位置的数量较多,例如大于8个时,由于该关联参数无法指示数量较多的不同候选SSB位置之间的关联关系,容易导致终端设备解调SSB失败,增大终端设备接入时延。However, when the number of candidate SSB positions used by the network device for sending SSB is large, for example, more than 8, since the correlation parameter cannot indicate the correlation between the large number of different candidate SSB positions, it is easy to cause the terminal equipment to demodulate SSB fails, increasing the access delay of terminal equipment.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法及相关设备,用于提升终端设备解调SSB的成功率,在初始接入过程中,缩短了终端设备初始接入的时间,提高了初始接入的可靠性,从而提升通信效率。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and related equipment, which are used to improve the success rate of terminal equipment to demodulate SSB, shorten the initial access time of the terminal equipment during the initial access process, and improve the reliability of initial access. to improve communication efficiency.
本申请实施例第一方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于终端设备,也可以应用于终端设备的部件执行(例如处理器、芯片或芯片***等)。在该方法中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,其中,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;然后,该终端设备根据该第一指示信息和该关联关系在监听窗口内检测SSB。A first aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a terminal device, and can also be applied to the execution of components of the terminal device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.). In this method, the terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB groups, wherein at least two candidate SSBs in the multiple candidate SSB group positions The group positions have an association relationship; then, the terminal device detects the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备在接收来自网络设备发送的用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置的第一指示信息之后,该终端设备根据该第一指示信息和该关联关系默认(确定)在监听窗口内满足该关联关系的不同候选SSB位置上具有相同的SSB index,即可以在监听窗口内确定多个候选SSB组位置,其中,多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;此后,终端设备再根据该第一指示信息和关联关系在监听窗口内检测SSB。即终端设备基于不同SSB组之间的关联关系,在监听窗口中的多个候选SSB组位置中,根据至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系检测SSB,可以提升终端设备解调SSB的成功率,在初始接入过程中,缩短了终端设备初始接入的接入时延,提高了初始接 入的可靠性,从而提升通信效率。Based on the above technical solutions, after the terminal device receives the first indication information sent from the network device and used to indicate the positions of the multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB group, the terminal device defaults (determines) according to the first indication information and the association relationship. Different candidate SSB positions within the listening window that satisfy the relationship have the same SSB index, that is, multiple candidate SSB group positions can be determined within the listening window, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions There is an association relationship; after that, the terminal device detects the SSB in the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship. That is, based on the association relationship between different SSB groups, the terminal device detects SSBs according to the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions among multiple candidate SSB group positions in the listening window, which can improve the ability of the terminal device to demodulate SSBs. The success rate, in the initial access process, shortens the access delay of the initial access of the terminal equipment, improves the reliability of the initial access, and thus improves the communication efficiency.
在本申请实施例第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有该关联关系,其中,该至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are located in at least two candidate SSB positions respectively Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
基于上述技术方案,在第一指示信息所指示的多个候选SSB组位置中,存在关联关系的不同候选SSB组之间,存在至少两个候选SSB位置也具有该关联关系,使得终端设备可以基于不同候选SSB在监听窗口中的多个候选SSB组位置中,根据至少两个候选SSB位置所具有的关联关系检测SSB,可以进一步提升终端设备解调SSB的成功率。Based on the above technical solution, among the multiple candidate SSB group positions indicated by the first indication information, among different candidate SSB groups that have an association relationship, there are at least two candidate SSB positions that also have the association relationship, so that the terminal device can be based on Different candidate SSBs are in multiple candidate SSB group positions in the listening window, and the SSB is detected according to the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB positions, which can further improve the success rate of the terminal device to demodulate the SSB.
在本申请实施例第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该关联关系为准共址QCL关系。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
基于上述技术方案,多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置所具有的该关联关系,以及多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB所具有的该关联关系中,该关联关系具体可以为QCL关系。Based on the above technical solution, in the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions, and the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions, the association relationship is specific Can be a QCL relationship.
在本申请实施例第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该终端设备根据该第一指示信息和该关联关系在监听窗口内检测SSB之前,该方法还包括:终端设备接收来自该网络设备的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于确定该关联关系;然后,终端设备根据该第二指示信息确定该关联关系。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, before the terminal device detects the SSB in the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship, the method further includes: the terminal device receives data from the network The second indication information of the device, the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship; then, the terminal device determines the association relationship according to the second indication information.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备可以根据来自网络设备的第二指示信息确定多个候选SSB组位置中,至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系,即终端设备可以依据网络设备的指示确定该关联关系,进一步提升终端设备根据检测得到的来自网络设备所发送的SSB,实现初始接入过程中的接入成功率。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can determine the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group locations among the multiple candidate SSB group locations according to the second indication information from the network device, that is, the terminal device can determine the The association relationship further improves the access success rate in the initial access process of the terminal device according to the detected SSB sent from the network device.
在本申请实施例第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备根据该第二指示信息确定该关联关系包括:该终端设备根据该第二指示信息和第三指示信息确定该关联关系,该第三指示信息包括该第一指示信息、多个候选SSB位置、多个SSB组位置和/或SSB数量。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device determining the association relationship according to the second indication information includes: the terminal device determining the association relationship according to the second indication information and the third indication information , the third indication information includes the first indication information, multiple candidate SSB positions, multiple SSB group positions and/or the number of SSBs.
本实施例中,终端设备可以进一步根据第二指示信息和第三指示信息,确定多个候选SSB组位置中,至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系,其中,第三指示信息具体可以包括在一个或多个监听窗口中多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置(即第一指示信息)、多个候选SSB位置、多个SSB组位置和/或SSB数量。由于该第三指示信息指示在一个或多个监听窗口中SSB或SSB组的信息,即终端设备在该关联关系的确定过程中,使用第三指示信息和第二指示信息联合确定,可以优化该关联关系的确定过程,提升终端设备根据该关联关系所检测得到的SSB实现初始接入过程中的接入成功率。In this embodiment, the terminal device may further determine, according to the second indication information and the third indication information, an association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group locations among the multiple candidate SSB group locations, where the third indication information may specifically be Including multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions (ie, first indication information), multiple candidate SSB positions, multiple SSB group positions and/or SSB numbers in one or more listening windows. Since the third indication information indicates the information of the SSB or SSB group in one or more listening windows, that is, the terminal device uses the third indication information and the second indication information to jointly determine in the process of determining the association relationship, it is possible to optimize the The determination process of the association relationship improves the access success rate in the initial access process of the SSB detected by the terminal device according to the association relationship.
在本申请实施例第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
基于上述技术方案,该第一指示信息具体可以通过物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS序列对应的比特来联合表示,即该第一指示信息可以通过物理广播信道PBCH负载中的比特和/或表示解调参考信号DMRS序列的比特实现,提供了该第一指示信息的多种实现方式,实现该第一指示信息的灵活配置的同时,提升方案的可实现性。Based on the above technical solutions, the first indication information can be specifically represented by the physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or the bits corresponding to the demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence, that is, the first indication information can be expressed by the bits in the physical broadcast channel PBCH load And/or the bit implementation representing the DMRS sequence of the demodulation reference signal, provides multiple implementation manners of the first indication information, realizes the flexible configuration of the first indication information, and improves the implementability of the solution.
在本申请实施例第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息的比特数为n个, 其中,该n为4、5或7。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
基于上述技术方案,该第一指示信息可以通过n个比特数实现,其中,n的取值可以为4、5或7,且n的不同的取值可以对应于第一指示信息所指示多个候选SSB组位置的候选SSB组对应的不同数量,提供了该第一指示信息的多种实现方式,实现该第一参考信号的灵活配置的同时,提升方案的可实现性。Based on the above technical solution, the first indication information may be implemented by n bits, where the value of n may be 4, 5 or 7, and different values of n may correspond to multiple values indicated by the first indication information The different numbers corresponding to the candidate SSB groups at the positions of the candidate SSB groups provide a variety of implementation manners of the first indication information, so as to realize the flexible configuration of the first reference signal and at the same time improve the implementability of the solution.
在本申请实施例第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第一候选SSB组位置和该第二候选SSB组位置之间具有该关联关系;和/或,该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第三候选SSB组位置和第四候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第三候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和该第二候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有该关联关系。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first candidate SSB group position There is the association between a candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position; and/or, the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, the second candidate SSB group position The indication information is used to indicate that there is the association relationship between at least one candidate SSB position in the third candidate SSB group position and at least one candidate SSB position in the second candidate SSB group position.
基于上述实现方案,用于确定多个候选SSB组位置中,至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系的第二指示信息可以存在多种实现方式。该第二指示信息具体可以指示至少两个候选SSB组位置中的不同SSB组之间关联关系,和/或,该第二指示信息具体可以指示至少两个候选SSB组位置中的不同SSB组所包含的至少一个候选SSB位置之间的关联关系。终端设备可以在不同的实现场景中使用对应的实现方式,根据该第二指示信息确定出至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系。Based on the above implementation solution, there may be various implementation manners for the second indication information used to determine the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group locations among the multiple candidate SSB group locations. The second indication information may specifically indicate the association relationship between different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions, and/or the second indication information may specifically indicate that the different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions The relationship between the included at least one candidate SSB location. The terminal device may use corresponding implementation manners in different implementation scenarios, and determine the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions according to the second indication information.
在本申请实施例第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息包括以下任意一项:In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the second indication information includes any one of the following:
公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon与同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset;或,Common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon and synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset; or,
物理下行控制信道-信息块类型1配置pdcch-ConfigSIB1;或,physical downlink control channel-information block type 1 configuration pdcch-ConfigSIB1; or,
控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero; or,
搜索空间零searchSpaceZero;或,searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero和searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, searchSpaceZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、controlResourceSetZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, controlResourceSetZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、searchSpaceZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero、searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero、controlResourceSetZero;或,searchSpaceZero, controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero。searchSpaceZero.
其中,subCarrierSpacingCommon表示指示信息块类型1配置(SIB1),(消息2/消息4)msg2/4,寻呼(paging)以及其它***消息(system information,SI)信息所使 用的子载波间隔;此外,对于工作在非授权频段上的***,其可以用于表示指示Q值的其中一个比特;Among them, subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
ssb-SubcarrierOffset表示SSB在频域最低子载波与重叠(overlap)的公共资源块(common resource block,CRB)中频域最低子载波之间子载波的偏移;ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset of the SSB between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain and the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB) in the frequency domain;
pdcch-ConfigSIB1,包含参数控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)#0和参数搜索空间(SearchSpace)#0的参数和,用来指示相关类型0-物理下行控制信道(type0-PDCCH)的配置参数;pdcch-ConfigSIB1, including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
controlResourceSetZero表示用来配置CORESET#0的参数;controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
searchSpaceZero表示用来搜索CORESET#0的SearchSpace#0的参数。searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
基于上述实现方案,第二指示信息可以通过上述多种不同的方式以实现,即可以通过表示上述参数的比特表示第二指示信息,提供了终端设备获取得到该第二指示信息的多种实现方式,提升方案的可实现性。Based on the above implementation solution, the second indication information can be implemented in the above-mentioned various ways, that is, the second indication information can be represented by the bits representing the above parameters, and various implementation ways for the terminal device to obtain the second indication information are provided. , to improve the feasibility of the scheme.
在本申请实施例第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息的比特数为m个,其中,该m为2或3。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
基于上述实现方案,该第二指示信息可以通过m个比特数实现,其中,m的取值可以为2或3,且m的不同的取值可以对应于第二指示信息所指示关联关系的不同实现方式,提供了该第二指示信息的多种实现方式,实现该第二指示信息的灵活配置的同时,提升方案的可实现性。Based on the above implementation solution, the second indication information may be implemented by m bits, where the value of m may be 2 or 3, and different values of m may correspond to different association relationships indicated by the second indication information In the implementation manner, multiple implementation manners of the second indication information are provided, so as to realize the flexible configuration of the second indication information, and at the same time improve the implementability of the solution.
在本申请实施例第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该监听窗口包括发现参考信号DRS窗口、半帧时长或者同步信号突发集SS burst set占用时长。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the listening window includes a discovery reference signal DRS window, a half-frame duration, or a occupied duration of a synchronization signal burst set SS burst set.
基于上述实现方案,终端设备检测SSB的监听窗口可以有多种不同的实现,其中,该监听窗口可以包括发现参考信号DRS窗口、半帧时长或者同步信号突发集SS burst set占用时长,使得终端设备可以在不同的场景下使用该第一指示信息和该关联关系检测SSB,提升方案的可实现性。Based on the above implementation scheme, the monitoring window for the terminal device to detect the SSB can be implemented in various ways, wherein the monitoring window may include the discovery reference signal DRS window, the half-frame duration or the occupied duration of the synchronization signal burst set SS burst set, so that the terminal The device can use the first indication information and the association relationship to detect the SSB in different scenarios, thereby improving the implementability of the solution.
本申请实施例第二方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于网络设备,也可以应用于网络设备的部件执行(例如处理器、芯片或芯片***等),在该方法中,网络设备确定多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;然后,该网络设备根据该关联关系在该多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB。A second aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a network device or to the execution of components of the network device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.). In this method, the network device Determine a plurality of candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, and at least two candidate SSB group positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship; then, the network device has at least two candidate SSB group positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship. A candidate SSB group position transmits the SSB.
基于上述实现方案,网络设备首先确定多个候选SSB组位置,其中,多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;此后,网络设备在发送SSB的过程中,根据该关联关系在多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB。其中,网络设备基于不同SSB组之间的关联关系,根据该关联关系在多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB,即网络设备基于该关联关系发送SSB,使得终端设备根据该关联关系监听网络设备所发送的SSB,可以提升终端设备解调SSB的成功率,在初始接入过程中,缩短了终端设备初始接入的接入时延,提高了初始接入的可靠性,从而提升通信效率。Based on the above implementation solution, the network device first determines multiple candidate SSB group positions, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship; The relationship transmits the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position of the plurality of candidate SSB group positions. The network device sends the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship between different SSB groups, that is, the network device sends the SSB based on the association relationship, so that the terminal device can send the SSB according to the association relationship. The association relationship monitors the SSB sent by the network device, which can improve the success rate of the terminal device to demodulate the SSB. During the initial access process, the access delay of the initial access of the terminal device is shortened, and the reliability of the initial access is improved. , so as to improve the communication efficiency.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有该关联关系,其中,该至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are located in at least two candidate SSB positions respectively Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
基于上述技术方案,在第一指示信息所指示的多个候选SSB组位置中,存在关联关系的不同候选SSB组之间,存在至少两个候选SSB位置也具有该关联关系,使得终端设备可以基于不同候选SSB在监听窗口中的多个候选SSB组位置中,根据至少两个候选SSB位置所具有的关联关系检测SSB,可以进一步提升终端设备解调SSB的成功率。Based on the above technical solution, among the multiple candidate SSB group positions indicated by the first indication information, among different candidate SSB groups that have an association relationship, there are at least two candidate SSB positions that also have the association relationship, so that the terminal device can be based on Different candidate SSBs are in multiple candidate SSB group positions in the listening window, and the SSB is detected according to the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB positions, which can further improve the success rate of the terminal device to demodulate the SSB.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该关联关系为准共址QCL关系。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
基于上述技术方案,多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置所具有的该关联关系,以及多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB所具有的该关联关系中,该关联关系具体可以为QCL关系。Based on the above technical solution, in the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions, and the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions, the association relationship is specific Can be a QCL relationship.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,且该第一候选SSB组位置和该第二候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系;该网络设备根据该关联关系在该多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB包括:该网络设备在该第一候选SSB组位置前进行LBT;如果LBT失败,则该网络设备在该第二候选组SSB位置对应的候选SSB位置上发送该SSB。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the multiple candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the first candidate SSB group position and the first candidate SSB group position The two candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship; the network device sending the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the plurality of candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship includes: the network device performs the first candidate SSB group position before the first candidate SSB group position. LBT; if the LBT fails, the network device sends the SSB at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate group SSB position.
基于上述实现方案,网络设备在发送SSB之前需要进行LBT,如果网络设备在第一候选SSB组位置进行LBT失败,则该网络设备在与该第一候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系的第二候选SSB组位置对应的候选SSB位置上发送SSB,使得由于LBT失败在第一候选SSB组位置未发送的SSB在第二候选SSB组位置发送。提供了网络设备根据该关联关系发送SSB的具体实现方式的同时,避免由LBT失败导致的SSB发送失败的情况发生,使得终端设备在第二候选SSB组位置接收得到第一候选SSB组位置对应的SSB,进一步提升初始接入的可靠性。Based on the above implementation solution, the network device needs to perform LBT before sending SSB. If the network device fails to perform LBT at the position of the first candidate SSB group, the network device is in the second candidate that has the association relationship with the first candidate SSB group position. The SSB is sent at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the SSB group position, so that the SSB not sent at the first candidate SSB group position due to the LBT failure is sent at the second candidate SSB group position. While providing a specific implementation manner for the network device to send the SSB according to the association relationship, it avoids the occurrence of the SSB sending failure caused by the LBT failure, so that the terminal device receives at the second candidate SSB group position and obtains the first candidate SSB group position corresponding to the position. SSB further improves the reliability of initial access.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置包括第三候选SSB组位置和第四候选SSB组位置,其中,该第三候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB位置,该第四候选SSB位置包括第二候选SSB位置,且该第三候选SSB组位置和该第四候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系,该第一SSB位置和该第二SSB位置具有该关联关系;该网络设备根据该关联关系在该多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB包括:该网络设备在该第一候选SSB位置进行LBT;如果LBT失败,则该网络设备在该第二候选SSB位置对应的候选SSB位置上发送该SSB。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the multiple candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, wherein the third candidate SSB group position includes the third candidate SSB group position A candidate SSB position, the fourth candidate SSB position includes the second candidate SSB position, and the third candidate SSB group position and the fourth candidate SSB group position have the association relationship, the first SSB position and the second SSB position Having the association relationship; the network device sending the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship includes: the network device performs LBT at the first candidate SSB position; if the LBT fails, then The network device sends the SSB at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate SSB position.
基于上述实现方案,网络设备在发送SSB之前需要进行LBT,如果网络设备在第三候选SSB组位置中的第一候选SSB位置进行LBT失败,则该网络设备在与该第三候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系的第四候选SSB组位置中,与该第一候选SSB位置具有该关联关系的第二候选SSB位置对应的候选SSB位置上发送SSB,使得由于LBT失败在第一候选SSB位置未发送的SSB在第二候选SSB位置发送。提供了网络设备根据该关联关系发送SSB的另一种具体实现方式的同时,避免由LBT失败导致的SSB发送失败的情况发生,使得终端设备在第二候选SSB位置接收得到第一候选SSB位置对应的SSB,进一步提升初始接入的可 靠性。Based on the above implementation solution, the network device needs to perform LBT before sending the SSB. If the network device fails to perform LBT at the first candidate SSB position in the third candidate SSB group position, the network device has the third candidate SSB group position with the third candidate SSB group position. In the fourth candidate SSB group position of the association relationship, the SSB is sent at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate SSB position having the association relationship with the first candidate SSB position, so that the SSB is not sent at the first candidate SSB position due to LBT failure The SSB is sent at the second candidate SSB location. Another specific implementation manner in which the network device sends the SSB according to the association relationship is provided, while avoiding the occurrence of the SSB sending failure caused by the LBT failure, so that the terminal device receives the first candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate SSB position. The SSB can further improve the reliability of initial access.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the method further includes: sending, by the network device, first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups.
基于上述实现方案,网络设备还可以向终端设备发送用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置的第一指示信息,使得终端设备可以根据该第一指示信息确定该个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,并进一步在多个候选SSB组位置中根据至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系检测SSB(或者SSB位置、或者SSB index),可以提升终端设备解调SSB的成功率,在初始接入过程中,缩短了终端设备初始接入的接入时延,提高了初始接入的可靠性,从而提升通信效率。Based on the above implementation solution, the network device may also send first indication information for indicating the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB groups to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate synchronization signal block SSB group according to the first indication information position, and further detect SSB (or SSB position, or SSB index) according to the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions in multiple candidate SSB group positions, which can improve the success rate of terminal equipment demodulation SSB. During the access process, the access delay of the initial access of the terminal device is shortened, the reliability of the initial access is improved, and the communication efficiency is improved.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
基于上述技术方案,该第一指示信息具体可以通过物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS序列对应的比特来联合表示,即该第一指示信息可以通过物理广播信道PBCH负载中的比特和/或表示解调参考信号DMRS序列的比特实现,提供了该第一指示信息的多种实现方式,实现该第一指示信息的灵活配置的同时,提升方案的可实现性。Based on the above technical solutions, the first indication information can be specifically represented by the physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or the bits corresponding to the demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence, that is, the first indication information can be expressed by the bits in the physical broadcast channel PBCH load And/or the bit implementation representing the DMRS sequence of the demodulation reference signal, provides multiple implementation manners of the first indication information, realizes the flexible configuration of the first indication information, and improves the implementability of the solution.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息的比特数为n个,其中,该n为4、5或7。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
基于上述技术方案,该第一指示信息可以通过n个比特数实现,其中,n的取值可以为4、5或7,且n的不同的取值可以对应于第一指示信息所指示多个候选SSB组位置的候选SSB组对应的不同数量,提供了该第一指示信息的多种实现方式,实现该第一参考信号的灵活配置的同时,提升方案的可实现性。Based on the above technical solution, the first indication information may be implemented by n bits, where the value of n may be 4, 5 or 7, and different values of n may correspond to multiple values indicated by the first indication information The different numbers corresponding to the candidate SSB groups at the positions of the candidate SSB groups provide a variety of implementation manners of the first indication information, so as to realize the flexible configuration of the first reference signal and at the same time improve the implementability of the solution.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于确定该关联关系。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the method further includes: sending, by the network device, second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备还可以向终端设备发送用于确定该关联关系的第二指示信息,使得终端设备可以依据网络设备的指示确定该关联关系,进一步提升终端设备根据检测得到的来自网络设备所发送的SSB,实现初始接入过程中的接入成功率。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can also send the second indication information for determining the association relationship to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine the association relationship according to the instructions of the network device, and further improve the efficiency of the terminal device according to the detected information from the network device. The sent SSB realizes the access success rate in the initial access process.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第五候选SSB组位置和第六候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第五候选SSB组位置和该第六候选SSB组位置之间具有该关联关系;和/或,该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第七候选SSB组位置和第八候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第七候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和该第八候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有该关联关系。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a fifth candidate SSB group position and a sixth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first There is the association between the five candidate SSB group positions and the sixth candidate SSB group position; and/or, the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a seventh candidate SSB group position and an eighth candidate SSB group position, the second candidate SSB group position The indication information is used to indicate that there is the association relationship between at least one candidate SSB position in the seventh candidate SSB group position and at least one candidate SSB position in the eighth candidate SSB group position.
基于上述实现方案,用于确定多个候选SSB组位置中,至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系的第二指示信息可以存在多种实现方式。该第二指示信息具体可以指示至少两个候选SSB组位置中的不同SSB组之间关联关系,和/或,该第二指示信息具体可以指示至少两个候选SSB组位置中的不同SSB组所包含的至少一个候选SSB位置之间的关联关系。终端设备可以在不同的实现场景中使用对应的实现方式,根据该第二指示信息确定出至少 两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系。Based on the above implementation solution, there may be various implementation manners for the second indication information used for determining the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group locations among the multiple candidate SSB group locations. The second indication information may specifically indicate the association relationship between different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions, and/or the second indication information may specifically indicate that the different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions The relationship between the included at least one candidate SSB location. The terminal device may use corresponding implementation manners in different implementation scenarios, and determine the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions according to the second indication information.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息包括以下任意一项:In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the second indication information includes any one of the following:
公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon与同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset;或,Common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon and synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset; or,
物理下行控制信道-信息块类型1配置pdcch-ConfigSIB1;或,physical downlink control channel-information block type 1 configuration pdcch-ConfigSIB1; or,
控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero; or,
搜索空间零searchSpaceZero;或,searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero和searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset”和controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset" and controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, searchSpaceZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、controlResourceSetZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, controlResourceSetZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、searchSpaceZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero、searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero、controlResourceSetZero;或,searchSpaceZero, controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero。searchSpaceZero.
其中,subCarrierSpacingCommon表示指示信息块类型1配置(SIB1),(消息2/消息4)msg2/4,寻呼(paging)以及其它***消息(system information,SI)信息所使用的子载波间隔;此外,对于工作在非授权频段上的***,其可以用于表示指示Q值的其中一个比特;Among them, subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
ssb-SubcarrierOffset表示SSB中频域最低子载波与重叠(overlap)的公共资源块(common resource block,CRB)中频域最低子载波之间子载波的偏移;ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
pdcch-ConfigSIB1,包含参数控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)#0和参数搜索空间(SearchSpace)#0的参数和,用来指示相关类型0-物理下行控制信道(type0-PDCCH)的配置参数;pdcch-ConfigSIB1, including the parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
controlResourceSetZero表示用来配置CORESET#0的参数;controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
searchSpaceZero表示用来搜索CORESET#0的SearchSpace#0的参数。searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
基于上述实现方案,第二指示信息可以通过上述多种不同的方式以实现,即可以通过表示上述参数的比特表示第二指示信息,提供了终端设备获取得到该第二指示信息的多种实现方式,提升方案的可实现性。Based on the above implementation solution, the second indication information can be implemented in the above-mentioned various ways, that is, the second indication information can be represented by the bits representing the above parameters, and various implementation ways for the terminal device to obtain the second indication information are provided. , to improve the feasibility of the scheme.
在本申请实施例第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息的比特数为m个,其中,该m为2或3。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
基于上述实现方案,该第二指示信息可以通过m个比特数实现,其中,m的取值可以为2或3,且m的不同的取值可以对应于第二指示信息所指示关联关系的不同实现方式, 提供了该第二指示信息的多种实现方式,实现该第二指示信息的灵活配置的同时,提升方案的可实现性。Based on the above implementation solution, the second indication information may be implemented by m bits, where the value of m may be 2 or 3, and different values of m may correspond to different association relationships indicated by the second indication information Implementation manners, multiple implementation manners of the second indication information are provided, so as to realize the flexible configuration of the second indication information and at the same time improve the implementability of the solution.
本申请实施例第三方面提供了一种通信装置,包括收发单元和处理单元;A third aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication device, including a transceiver unit and a processing unit;
该收发单元,用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,其中,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;The transceiver unit is configured to receive first indication information from a network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, wherein at least two candidate SSB groups in the multiple candidate SSB group positions location is associated;
该处理单元,用于根据该第一指示信息和该关联关系在监听窗口内检测SSB。The processing unit is configured to detect the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
在本申请实施例第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有该关联关系,其中,该至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are located in at least two candidate SSB positions respectively Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
在本申请实施例第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该关联关系为准共址QCL关系。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
在本申请实施例第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元,还用于接收来自该网络设备的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于确定该关联关系;In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the transceiver unit is further configured to receive second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship;
该处理单元,还用于根据该第二指示信息确定该关联关系。The processing unit is further configured to determine the association relationship according to the second indication information.
在本申请实施例第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该处理单元,具体用于根据该第二指示信息和第三指示信息确定该关联关系,该第三指示信息包括该第一指示信息、多个候选SSB位置、多个SSB组位置和/或SSB数量。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the processing unit is specifically configured to determine the association relationship according to the second indication information and the third indication information, where the third indication information includes the first indication Information, multiple candidate SSB locations, multiple SSB group locations, and/or number of SSBs.
在本申请实施例第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
在本申请实施例第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息的比特数为n个,其中,该n为4、5或7。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
在本申请实施例第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第一候选SSB组位置和该第二候选SSB组位置之间具有该关联关系;In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first candidate SSB group position There is the association between a candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position;
和/或,and / or,
该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第三候选SSB组位置和第四候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第三候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和该第二候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有该关联关系。The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and the second candidate SSB group position in the third candidate SSB group positions At least one candidate SSB position in the SSB group position has the association relationship.
在本申请实施例第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息包括以下任意一项:In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the second indication information includes any one of the following:
公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon与同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset;或,Common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon and synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset; or,
物理下行控制信道-信息块类型1配置pdcch-ConfigSIB1;或,physical downlink control channel-information block type 1 configuration pdcch-ConfigSIB1; or,
控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero; or,
搜索空间零searchSpaceZero;或,searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero和searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset”和controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset" and controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, searchSpaceZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、controlResourceSetZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, controlResourceSetZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、searchSpaceZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero、searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero、controlResourceSetZero;或,searchSpaceZero, controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero。searchSpaceZero.
其中,subCarrierSpacingCommon表示指示信息块类型1配置(SIB1),(消息2/消息4)msg2/4,寻呼(paging)以及其它***消息(system information,SI)信息所使用的子载波间隔;此外,对于工作在非授权频段上的***,其可以用于表示指示Q值的其中一个比特;Among them, subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
ssb-SubcarrierOffset表示SSB中频域最低子载波与重叠(overlap)的公共资源块(common resource block,CRB)中频域最低子载波之间子载波的偏移;ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
pdcch-ConfigSIB1,包含参数控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)#0和参数搜索空间(SearchSpace)#0的参数和,用来指示相关类型0-物理下行控制信道(type0-PDCCH)的配置参数;pdcch-ConfigSIB1, including the parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
controlResourceSetZero表示用来配置CORESET#0的参数;controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
searchSpaceZero表示用来搜索CORESET#0的SearchSpace#0的参数。searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
在本申请实施例第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息的比特数为m个,其中,该m为2或3。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
在本申请实施例第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该监听窗口包括发现参考信号DRS窗口、半帧时长或者同步信号突发集SS burst set占用时长。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the listening window includes a discovery reference signal DRS window, a half-frame duration, or a occupied duration of a synchronization signal burst set SS burst set.
本申请实施例第三方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第一方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,具体均可以参阅第一方面,此处不再赘述。In the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the component modules of the communication device may also be used to perform the steps performed in each possible implementation manner of the first aspect. For details, refer to the first aspect, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例第四方面提供了一种通信装置,包括收发单元和处理单元;A fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication device, including a transceiver unit and a processing unit;
该处理单元,用于确定多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;The processing unit is configured to determine multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, and at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an associated relationship;
该收发单元,用于根据该关联关系在该多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB。The transceiver unit is configured to send the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the plurality of candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship.
在本申请实施例第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有该关联关系,其中,该至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are located in at least two candidate SSB positions respectively Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
在本申请实施例第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该关联关系为准共址QCL关系。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,且该第一候选SSB组位置和该第二候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系;In a possible implementation manner, the plurality of candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the first candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position have the association relation;
该收发单元具体用于:The transceiver unit is specifically used for:
在该第一候选SSB组位置前进行LBT;perform LBT before the first candidate SSB group position;
如果LBT失败,则在该第二候选组SSB位置对应的候选SSB位置上发送该SSB。If the LBT fails, the SSB is sent at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate group SSB position.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置包括第三候选SSB组位置和第四候选SSB组位置,其中,该第三候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB位置,该第四候选SSB位置包括第二候选SSB位置,且该第三候选SSB组位置和该第四候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系,该第一SSB位置和该第二SSB位置具有该关联关系;In a possible implementation manner, the plurality of candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, wherein the third candidate SSB group position includes a first candidate SSB group position, the fourth candidate SSB group position The candidate SSB position includes a second candidate SSB position, and the third candidate SSB group position and the fourth candidate SSB group position have the association relationship, and the first SSB position and the second SSB position have the association relationship;
该收发单元具体用于:The transceiver unit is specifically used for:
在该第一候选SSB位置进行LBT;perform LBT at the first candidate SSB position;
如果LBT失败,则在该第二候选SSB位置对应的候选SSB位置上发送该SSB。If the LBT fails, the SSB is sent at the candidate SSB position corresponding to the second candidate SSB position.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元,还用于发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置。In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver unit is further configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息的比特数为n个,其中,该n为4、5或7。In a possible implementation manner, the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元,还用于发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于确定该关联关系。In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver unit is further configured to send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第五候选SSB组位置和第六候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第五候选SSB组位置和该第六候选SSB组位置之间具有该关联关系;In a possible implementation manner, the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a fifth candidate SSB group position and a sixth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the fifth candidate SSB group position and the sixth candidate SSB group position The six candidate SSB group positions have this association relationship;
和/或,and / or,
该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第七候选SSB组位置和第八候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第七候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和该第八候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有该关联关系。The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a seventh candidate SSB group position and an eighth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and the eighth candidate SSB group position in the seventh candidate SSB group positions At least one candidate SSB position in the SSB group position has the association relationship.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息包括以下任意一项:In a possible implementation manner, the second indication information includes any one of the following:
公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon与同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset;或,Common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon and synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset; or,
物理下行控制信道-信息块类型1配置pdcch-ConfigSIB1;或,physical downlink control channel-information block type 1 configuration pdcch-ConfigSIB1; or,
控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero; or,
搜索空间零searchSpaceZero;或,searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero和searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset”和controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset" and controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, searchSpaceZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、controlResourceSetZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, controlResourceSetZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、searchSpaceZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero、searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero、controlResourceSetZero;或,searchSpaceZero, controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero。searchSpaceZero.
其中,subCarrierSpacingCommon表示指示信息块类型1配置(SIB1),(消息2/消息4)msg2/4,寻呼(paging)以及其它***消息(system information,SI)信息所使用的子载波间隔;此外,对于工作在非授权频段上的***,其可以用于表示指示Q值的其中一个比特;Among them, subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
ssb-SubcarrierOffset表示SSB中频域最低子载波与重叠(overlap)的公共资源块(common resource block,CRB)中频域最低子载波之间子载波的偏移;ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
pdcch-ConfigSIB1,包含参数控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)#0和参数搜索空间(SearchSpace)#0的参数和,用来指示相关类型0-物理下行控制信道(type0-PDCCH)的配置参数;pdcch-ConfigSIB1, including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
controlResourceSetZero表示用来配置CORESET#0的参数;controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
searchSpaceZero表示用来搜索CORESET#0的SearchSpace#0的参数。searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息的比特数为m个,其中,该m为2或3。In a possible implementation manner, the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
本申请实施例第四方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第二方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,具体均可以参阅第二方面,此处不再赘述。In the fourth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the component modules of the communication device may also be used to perform the steps performed in each possible implementation manner of the second aspect. For details, refer to the second aspect, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例第五方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置具体可以为网络设备,也可以为网络设备的部件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片***等),其中,该通信装置包括处理器和通信接口,该通信接口和该处理器耦合,该处理器用于运行计算机程序或指令,使得前述第一方面或第一方面任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法被执行。A fifth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may specifically be a network device, or may be a component of a network device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.), wherein the communication device includes a processor and a A communication interface, which is coupled to the processor, and the processor is used for running a computer program or instructions, so that the method described in the foregoing first aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect is performed.
本申请实施例第六方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置具体可以为终端设备,也可以为终端设备的部件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片***等),其中,该通信接口和该处理器耦合,该处理器用于运行计算机程序或指令,使得前述第二方面或第二方面任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法被执行。A sixth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may specifically be a terminal device, or may be a component of the terminal device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.), wherein the communication interface and the processor Coupled, the processor is configured to run a computer program or instructions, so that the method described in the foregoing second aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect is performed.
本申请实施例第七方面提供一种存储一个或多个计算机执行指令的计算机可读存储介质,当计算机执行指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行如上述第一方面或第一方面任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。A seventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores one or more computer-executable instructions. When the computer-executable instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the first aspect or any one of the first aspects. a possible implementation of the method described.
本申请实施例第八方面提供一种存储一个或多个计算机执行指令的计算机可读存储介质,当计算机执行指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行如上述第二方面或第二方面任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。An eighth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores one or more computer-executable instructions. When the computer-executable instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes any one of the second aspect or the second aspect above. a possible implementation of the method described.
本申请实施例第九方面提供一种存储一个或多个计算机的计算机程序产品(或称计算机程序),当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面任意一种可能实现方式。A ninth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a computer program product (or computer program) that stores one or more computers. When the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer can execute the first aspect or any of the first aspect. One possible way to do it.
本申请实施例第十方面提供一种存储一个或多个计算机的计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行执行时,使得该计算机行上述第二方面或第二方面任意一种可能 实现方式的方法。A tenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a computer program product that stores one or more computers. When the computer program product is executed on a computer, the computer can perform the second aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect. Methods.
本申请实施例第十一方面提供了一种芯片***,该芯片***包括处理器,用于支持接入网设备实现上述第一方面或第一方面任意一种可能的实现方式所涉及的功能。在一种可能的设计中,该芯片***还可以包括存储器,存储器,用于保存该接入网设备必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片***,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。An eleventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor configured to support an access network device to implement the functions involved in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect. In a possible design, the chip system may further include a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the access network device. The chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
本申请实施例第十二方面提供了一种芯片***,该芯片***包括处理器,用于支持终端设备实现上述第二方面或第二方面任意一种可能的实现方式所涉及的功能。在一种可能的设计中,该芯片***还可以包括存储器,存储器,用于保存该终端设备必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片***,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。A twelfth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor for supporting a terminal device to implement the functions involved in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect. In a possible design, the chip system may further include a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the terminal device. The chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
本申请实施例第十三方面提供了一种通信***,该通信***包括上述第三方面的通信装置和第四方面的通信装置,或,该通信***包括上述第五方面的通信装置和第六方面的通信装置,或,该通信***包括上述第七方面的通信装置和第八方面的通信装置,或,该通信***包括上述第九方面的通信装置和第十方面的通信装置,或,该通信***包括上述第十一方面的通信装置和第十二方面的通信装置。A thirteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system includes the communication device of the third aspect and the communication device of the fourth aspect, or, the communication system includes the communication device of the fifth aspect and the sixth aspect The communication device of the aspect, or the communication system includes the communication device of the seventh aspect and the communication device of the eighth aspect, or the communication system includes the communication device of the ninth aspect and the communication device of the tenth aspect, or, the communication device A communication system includes the communication device of the eleventh aspect and the communication device of the twelfth aspect.
其中,第三、第五、第七、第九、第十一、第十三方面或者其中任一种可能实现方式所带来的技术效果可参见第一方面或第一方面不同可能实现方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。Wherein, for the technical effects brought by the third, fifth, seventh, ninth, eleventh, thirteenth aspects or any of the possible implementations thereof, reference may be made to the first aspect or the different possible implementations of the first aspect The technical effects brought about are not repeated here.
其中,第四、第六、第八、第十、第十二、第十三方面或者其中任一种可能实现方式所带来的技术效果可参见第二方面或第二方面不同可能实现方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。Wherein, for the technical effects brought by the fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, twelfth, thirteenth aspects or any of the possible implementations thereof, reference may be made to the second aspect or the different possible implementations of the second aspect. The technical effects brought about are not repeated here.
从以上技术方案可以看出,本申请提供的一些实施例中,终端设备在接收来自网络设备发送的用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置的第一指示信息之后,该终端设备根据该第一指示信息和该关联关系默认(确定)在监听窗口内具有相同的SSB index,即可以在监听窗口内确定多个候选SSB组位置,其中,多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;此后,终端设备再根据该第一指示信息和关联关系在监听窗口内检测SSB。即终端设备基于不同SSB组之间的关联关系,在监听窗口中的多个候选SSB组位置中,根据至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系检测SSB,可以提升终端设备解调SSB的成功率,在初始接入过程中,缩短了终端设备初始接入的接入时延,提高了初始接入的可靠性,从而提升通信效率。It can be seen from the above technical solutions that in some embodiments provided in this application, after the terminal device receives the first indication information sent from the network device and used to indicate the positions of the multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups, the terminal device will The first indication information and the association relationship have the same SSB index by default (determined) in the listening window, that is, multiple candidate SSB group positions can be determined in the listening window, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions The group position has an association relationship; after that, the terminal device detects the SSB in the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship. That is, based on the association relationship between different SSB groups, the terminal device detects SSBs according to the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions among multiple candidate SSB group positions in the listening window, which can improve the ability of the terminal device to demodulate SSBs. The success rate, in the initial access process, shortens the access delay of the initial access of the terminal equipment, improves the reliability of the initial access, and thus improves the communication efficiency.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例中网络通信架构的一个示意图;1 is a schematic diagram of a network communication architecture in an embodiment of the application;
图2为本申请实施例中SSB承载方式的一个示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an SSB bearing mode in an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例中SSB承载方式的另一个示意图;3 is another schematic diagram of an SSB bearing mode in an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例中SSB承载方式的另一个示意图;FIG. 4 is another schematic diagram of an SSB bearing mode in an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例中一种通信方法的一个示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a communication method in an embodiment of the application;
图6为本申请实施例中一种通信方法的另一个示意图;6 is another schematic diagram of a communication method in an embodiment of the application;
图7为本申请实施例中一种通信方法的另一个示意图;FIG. 7 is another schematic diagram of a communication method in an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例中一种通信方法的另一个示意图;FIG. 8 is another schematic diagram of a communication method in an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例中一种通信装置的一个示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication device in an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例中一种通信装置的另一个示意图;FIG. 10 is another schematic diagram of a communication device in an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例中一种通信装置的另一个示意图;FIG. 11 is another schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例中一种通信装置的另一个示意图。FIG. 12 is another schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly and completely described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
首先,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。First, some terms in the embodiments of the present application are explained to facilitate understanding by those skilled in the art.
(1)终端设备:可以是能够接收网络设备调度和指示信息的无线终端设备,无线终端设备可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,或具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。(1) Terminal device: It can be a wireless terminal device that can receive scheduling and instruction information of network devices. The wireless terminal device can be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users, or a handheld device with wireless connection function, or Other processing equipment connected to the wireless modem.
终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与一个或多个核心网或者互联网进行通信,终端设备可以是移动终端设备,如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话,手机(mobile phone))、计算机和数据卡,例如,可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置,它们与无线接入网交换语言和/或数据。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑等设备。无线终端设备也可以称为***、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端设备(remote terminal)、接入终端设备(access terminal)、用户终端设备(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、用户站(subscriber station,SS)、用户端设备(customer premises equipment,CPE)、终端(terminal)、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等。终端设备也可以是可穿戴设备以及下一代通信***,例如,5G通信***中的终端设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等。Terminal equipment can communicate with one or more core networks or the Internet via a radio access network (RAN), and the terminal equipment can be a mobile terminal equipment, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone, mobile phone (mobile phone), computer and data cards, for example, may be portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer built-in or vehicle mounted mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with the radio access network. For example, personal communication service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), tablets Computer (Pad), computer with wireless transceiver function and other equipment. Wireless terminal equipment may also be referred to as a system, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station (MS), a remote station, an access point ( access point (AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user agent (user agent), subscriber station (SS), user terminal equipment (customer premises equipment, CPE), terminal (terminal), user equipment (user equipment, UE), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), etc. The terminal device may also be a wearable device and a next-generation communication system, for example, a terminal device in a 5G communication system or a terminal device in a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN).
(2)网络设备:可以是无线网络中的设备,例如网络设备可以为将终端设备接入到无线网络的无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点(或设备),又可以称为基站。目前,一些RAN设备的举例为:5G通信***中的新一代基站(generation Node B,gNodeB)、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved Node B,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU),或无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)接入点(access point, AP)等。另外,在一种网络结构中,网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit,DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备。(2) Network device: It can be a device in a wireless network. For example, a network device can be a radio access network (RAN) node (or device) that connects a terminal device to a wireless network, also known as a base station. . At present, some examples of RAN equipment are: generation Node B (gNodeB), transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), wireless network in the 5G communication system Controller (radio network controller, RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved Node B , or home Node B, HNB), base band unit (base band unit, BBU), or wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) access point (access point, AP), etc. In addition, in a network structure, the network device may include a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) node, or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
其中,网络设备能够向终端设备发送配置信息(例如承载于调度消息和/或指示消息中),终端设备进一步根据该配置信息进行网络配置,使得网络设备与终端设备之间的网络配置对齐;或者,通过预设于网络设备的网络配置以及预设于终端设备的网络配置,使得网络设备与终端设备之间的网络配置对齐。具体来说,“对齐”是指网络设备与终端设备之间存在交互消息时,两者对于交互消息收发的载波频率、交互消息类型的确定、交互消息中所承载的字段信息的含义、或者是交互消息的其它配置的理解一致。Wherein, the network device can send configuration information to the terminal device (for example, carried in a scheduling message and/or an instruction message), and the terminal device further performs network configuration according to the configuration information, so that the network configuration between the network device and the terminal device is aligned; or , through the network configuration preset in the network device and the network configuration preset in the terminal device, the network configuration between the network device and the terminal device is aligned. Specifically, "alignment" refers to the determination of the carrier frequency for sending and receiving the interaction message, the determination of the type of the interaction message, the meaning of the field information carried in the interaction message, or the The understanding of other configurations of interactive messages is consistent.
此外,在其它可能的情况下,网络设备可以是其它为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。为方便描述,本申请实施例并不限定。In addition, in other possible cases, the network device may be other devices that provide wireless communication functions for the terminal device. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device. For convenience of description, the embodiments of the present application are not limited.
网络设备还可以包括核心网设备,核心网设备例如包括访问和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)或会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)等。The network equipment may also include core network equipment, which includes, for example, an access and mobility management function (AMF), a user plane function (UPF), or a session management function (SMF) Wait.
本申请实施例中,用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备,也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片***,该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In this embodiment of the present application, the apparatus for implementing the function of the network device may be the network device, or may be an apparatus capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the apparatus may be installed in the network device. In the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the device for realizing the function of the network device being a network device as an example.
(3)本申请实施例中的术语“***”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如“A,B和C中的至少一个”包括A,B,C,AB,AC,BC或ABC。以及,除非有特别说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。(3) The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably. "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or", which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are an "or" relationship. "At least one item(s) below" or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s). For example "at least one of A, B and C" includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC. And, unless otherwise specified, ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects degree.
本申请可以应用于如图1所示非授权频段(unlicensed band)的通信***中,包括网络设备和多个终端设备(UE)。在该通信***中,UE1-UE5都可以和网络设备进行通信,其链路环境包括了上行、下行以及侧行链路(Side-link),链路中传输的信息包括了实际传输的数据信息,以及用于指示或调度实际数据的控制信息。同时,UE3,UE4和UE5也可以组成一个通信***,其链路传输环境和前述一致,具体的信息交互可以依托于网络的配置方式。The present application can be applied to an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) communication system as shown in FIG. 1 , including network equipment and multiple terminal equipments (UEs). In this communication system, UE1-UE5 can all communicate with network equipment, the link environment includes uplink, downlink and side-link, and the information transmitted in the link includes actually transmitted data information , and control information to indicate or schedule actual data. At the same time, UE3, UE4 and UE5 can also form a communication system, and the link transmission environment thereof is the same as the above, and the specific information exchange can depend on the configuration of the network.
通过将通信***部署到共享(非授权)频段上,不但可以提升通信***的吞吐量,还可以解决频谱资源紧缺的问题。在第五代移动通信技术背景框架下,将部署在共享频段的技术统一叫做新无线非授权(new radio unlicensed,NRU)。在共享频段上,除了当前的新空口(new radio,NR)***之外,还包括其它诸如雷达(radar)、无线保真(wireless fidelity,WIFI)、蓝牙及其它异运营商的接入***,因此,法规规定工作在 共享频段上的***需要支持如下所有或者部分关键技术,即先听后说机制(listen before talk,LBT)、发送功率控制(transmit power control,TPC)和动态频谱选择(dynamic frequency selection,DFS)。其中,LBT机制是指各种接入设备在使用信道之前都要先去获取目标信道所在频段上的干扰情况,只有当目标频段信道上的干扰水平小于等于预设门限值,才能使用该信道。TPC机制是指为了不影响其它接入设备的正常通信,工作在共享授权上的发送设备不能无限制的提升自身的发射功率。DFS机制是指工作在共享授权上***需要及时的避开高优先级***所在的频段,动态切换到干扰较低的频段上工作。By deploying the communication system on the shared (unlicensed) frequency band, not only the throughput of the communication system can be improved, but also the problem of shortage of spectrum resources can be solved. Under the background of the fifth-generation mobile communication technology, the technologies deployed in the shared frequency band are collectively called new radio unlicensed (new radio unlicensed, NRU). In the shared frequency band, in addition to the current new radio (NR) system, it also includes other access systems such as radar (radar), wireless fidelity (WIFI), Bluetooth and other different operators. Therefore, regulations stipulate that systems operating in shared frequency bands need to support all or some of the following key technologies, namely, listen before talk (LBT), transmit power control (TPC) and dynamic spectrum selection (dynamic spectrum selection). frequency selection, DFS). Among them, the LBT mechanism means that various access devices must first obtain the interference situation on the frequency band where the target channel is located before using the channel. Only when the interference level on the target frequency band channel is less than or equal to the preset threshold value, the channel can be used. . The TPC mechanism means that in order not to affect the normal communication of other access devices, a sending device working on a shared authorization cannot increase its own transmit power without limitation. The DFS mechanism means that the system working on the shared license needs to avoid the frequency band where the high-priority system is located in time, and dynamically switch to the frequency band with lower interference to work.
示例性的,以用户设备(UE)为终端设备,基站(gNB)为网络设备为例,用户设备和基站建立通信之前将会进入初始接入的过程,UE首先通过解调同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block,SS/PBCH block或SSB或SSB index或SS/PBCH block index)获取用于初始接入的重要信息。其中,SSB主要由主同步信号(primary synchronization signal,PSS),辅同步信号(secondary synchronization signal,SSS)和物理广播信道(physical broadcast channel,PBCH)组成,时频域上为跨越4个正交频分复用符号(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)和频域上占20个资源块(resource blocks,RBs)的二维区域。Exemplarily, taking the user equipment (UE) as the terminal device and the base station (gNB) as the network device as an example, the initial access process will be entered before the user equipment and the base station establish communication. The UE first demodulates the synchronization signal/physical broadcast The channel block (synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block, SS/PBCH block or SSB or SSB index or SS/PBCH block index) acquires important information for initial access. Among them, SSB is mainly composed of primary synchronization signal (PSS), secondary synchronization signal (SSS) and physical broadcast channel (PBCH). The two-dimensional area occupies 20 resource blocks (RBs) in the frequency domain.
具体的,通信***允许的最大发送SSB数量和当前***所在的频段有关。对于支持频分复用模式(frequency-division duplex,FDD)的***来说,当UE和gNB在小于等于3兆赫兹(GHz)的频段工作时,gNB发送的最大SSB数量为4;对于时分复用模式(time-division duplex,TDD)***来说,当UE和gNB在小于等于2.3GHz的频段工作时,gNB发送的最大SSB数量为4。此时,UE通过解调SSB中映射到PBCH中3-比特(bits)的解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)序列(该DMRS序列共占3-bits)获取候选SSB位置。对于FDD***,当UE和gNB在大于3GHz及小于6GHz之间的频段上工作时,gNB发送的最大SSB数量为8;对于TDD***,当UE和gNB在大于2.3GHz以及小于6GHz之间的频段上工作时,gNB发送的最大SSB数量为8,UE通过解调SSB中3-bits的DMRS序列获取候选SSB位置。Specifically, the maximum number of transmitted SSBs allowed by the communication system is related to the frequency band in which the current system is located. For systems that support frequency-division duplex (FDD), when the UE and gNB operate in a frequency band less than or equal to 3 megahertz (GHz), the maximum number of SSBs sent by the gNB is 4; for time-division duplex In a mode (time-division duplex, TDD) system, when the UE and the gNB work in a frequency band less than or equal to 2.3 GHz, the maximum number of SSBs sent by the gNB is 4. At this time, the UE obtains the candidate SSB position by demodulating the demodulation reference signal (DMRS) sequence (the DMRS sequence occupies 3-bits) mapped to the 3-bit (bits) in the PBCH in the SSB. For the FDD system, when the UE and the gNB operate in the frequency band greater than 3GHz and less than 6GHz, the maximum number of SSBs sent by the gNB is 8; for the TDD system, when the UE and the gNB operate in the frequency band greater than 2.3GHz and less than 6GHz When working, the maximum number of SSBs sent by the gNB is 8, and the UE obtains the candidate SSB positions by demodulating the 3-bit DMRS sequence in the SSB.
当通信***工作的频段大于6GHz时,gNB可发送的SSB数量最多为64个,它通过PBCHpayload(PBCH负载)中的3-bit(以
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000001
表示)和表示3-bits的DMRS序列,共计6-bits表示。针对所发送的64个SSB,***引入了组的概念,即参数“ssb-PositionsInBurst”中包含了“groupPresence”和“inOneGroup”。参数“groupPresence”表示一组连续的SSBs,参数“inOneGroup”表示在组“groupPresence”内实际发送的SSB位置,不同组中的SSN图样(SSBpattern)相同。
When the frequency band of the communication system is greater than 6GHz, the maximum number of SSBs that can be sent by the gNB is 64.
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000001
represents) and represents the DMRS sequence of 3-bits, representing a total of 6-bits. For the 64 SSBs sent, the system introduces the concept of a group, that is, the parameter "ssb-PositionsInBurst" includes "groupPresence" and "inOneGroup". The parameter "groupPresence" indicates a group of consecutive SSBs, and the parameter "inOneGroup" indicates the actual SSB position sent in the group "groupPresence", and the SSN patterns (SSBpatterns) in different groups are the same.
比如,当UE解调出的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000002
时,其中,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000004
对应“000000”中的前三个比特,“DMRS序列”对应“000000”中的后三个比特。“000000”表示UE解调出的候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000005
为#0,对应的组位置为#0;当UE解调出的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000006
时,表示UE解调出的候选SSB位置为#7,对应的组位置为#0;当UE解调出的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000007
时,表示UE解调出的候选SSB位置为#15,对应的组位置为#1。
For example, when the UE demodulates the
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000002
, of which,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000004
Corresponding to the first three bits in "000000", "DMRS sequence" corresponds to the last three bits in "000000". "000000" indicates the candidate SSB position demodulated by the UE
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000005
is #0, and the corresponding group position is #0; when the UE demodulates the
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000006
, it indicates that the candidate SSB position demodulated by the UE is #7, and the corresponding group position is #0;
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000007
, it indicates that the candidate SSB position demodulated by the UE is #15, and the corresponding group position is #1.
再比如,假设“groupPresence=10101011,inOneGroup=10101011”,其SSB的发 送示例图如附图2所示。从图2中,可以发现,对于网络设备来说,参数“groupPresence”中取值为“1”的位置指示需要发送的包含SSB的组;参数“inOneGroup”取值为“1”的位置指示了每个组中需要发送的SSB位置,每个组中发送的SSB pattern都一样,即都为“10101011”。相应的,对于终端设备来说,参数“groupPresence”中取值为“1”的位置指示实际需要接收的包含SSB的组;参数“inOneGroup”取值为“1”的位置指示了每个组中实际需要接收的SSB位置,每个组中接收的SSB pattern都一样,即都为“10101011”。For another example, assuming "groupPresence=10101011, inOneGroup=10101011", an example diagram of SSB sending is shown in Fig. 2 . From Figure 2, it can be found that, for the network device, the position of the parameter "groupPresence" with the value of "1" indicates the group containing the SSB to be sent; the position of the parameter "inOneGroup" with the value of "1" indicates the The position of the SSB to be sent in each group, and the SSB pattern sent in each group is the same, that is, "10101011". Correspondingly, for a terminal device, the position of the parameter "groupPresence" with the value of "1" indicates the group containing the SSB that actually needs to be received; the position of the parameter "inOneGroup" with the value of "1" indicates the The actual SSB location that needs to be received, the received SSB pattern in each group is the same, that is, "10101011".
其中,参数“ssb-PositionsInBurst”被包含在***信息块1(system information block1,SIB1)中。对gNB来说,其在通过物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)/物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)给UE传输数据时,所分配的时频域资源将会避开发送SSB所占用的时频域资源。对UE来说,其通过解调参数“ssb-PositionsInBurst”之后,其认为发送SSB的时频域资源上不存在所调度的PDCCH/PDSCH资源,也即是我们常理解的速率匹配(rate matching,RM)。Among them, the parameter "ssb-PositionsInBurst" is included in the system information block 1 (system information block1, SIB1). For the gNB, when it transmits data to the UE through the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)/physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), the allocated time-frequency domain resources will be avoided. Time-frequency domain resources occupied by the sending SSB. For the UE, after passing the demodulation parameter "ssb-PositionsInBurst", it believes that there is no scheduled PDCCH/PDSCH resource on the time-frequency domain resources for sending SSB, which is the rate matching that we often understand. RM).
目前,当终端设备和网络设备在共享频段上通信时,考虑到LBT机制的存在,Rel-16的NRU***分别定义了突发集信号/发现参考信号(discovery reference signal,DRS)窗口和候选SSB位置(candidate SSB index/position,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000008
)的概念。其中,DRS窗口的持续时间可以为{0.5ms,1ms,2ms,3ms,4ms,5ms}。对于UE来说,默认一组SSBs(SS burst set)在DRS窗口内发送。Rel-16的NRU***主要工作的频段在6GHz以下,其可支持的最大发送SSB个数为8个。因此,在最长为5ms的DRS窗口内,当子载波间隔(sub-carrier sacing,SCS)为15千赫兹(KHz)时,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000009
它通过PBCH payload(PBCH负载)中的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000010
和3-bits的DMRS序列,共计4-bits指示;当子载波间隔为30KHz时,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000011
它通过PBCH payload(PBCH负载)中的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000012
和3-bits的DMRS序列,共计5-bits指示。也即比如,当子载波间隔为30KHz且DRS窗口为5ms时,共有20个候选位置用于发送实际的SSB位置(l)。这里需要说明的是,SIB1中的参数“ssb-PositionsInBurst”所指示的为l,表示的是实际发送的SSB位置,而非
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000013
At present, when the terminal device and the network device communicate on the shared frequency band, considering the existence of the LBT mechanism, the NRU system of Rel-16 defines the burst set signal/discovery reference signal (DRS) window and candidate SSB respectively. position(candidate SSB index/position,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000008
)the concept of. The duration of the DRS window may be {0.5ms, 1ms, 2ms, 3ms, 4ms, 5ms}. For the UE, by default a set of SSBs (SS burst set) are sent within the DRS window. The main working frequency band of the NRU system of Rel-16 is below 6GHz, and the maximum number of SSBs it can support is 8. Therefore, in a DRS window of up to 5ms, when the sub-carrier spacing (SCS) is 15 kilohertz (KHz),
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000009
It passes the PBCH payload (PBCH payload) in
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000010
and 3-bits DMRS sequence, a total of 4-bits indication; when the subcarrier spacing is 30KHz,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000011
It passes the PBCH payload (PBCH payload) in
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000012
and 3-bits DMRS sequence, a total of 5-bits indication. That is, for example, when the subcarrier spacing is 30KHz and the DRS window is 5ms, there are 20 candidate positions in total for transmitting the actual SSB position (1). It should be noted here that the parameter "ssb-PositionsInBurst" in SIB1 indicates 1, which indicates the actual sent SSB position, not the
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000013
即在共享频段上通信时,针对同一个SSB,网络设备可以在具有关联关系的一个或多个下行发送波束方向上发送该SSB,以提升终端设备的接入成功率。其中,终端设备通过指示SSB位置的参数确定不同的SSB位置,并通过SSB位置之间的关联参数确定不同SSB位置之间的关联关系。具体地,考虑到实际发送SSB位置(l)可以在多个候选位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000014
上发送,***引入了准共址(quasi co-location,QCL)的概念,通过公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000016
表示,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000017
表示SSB中映射到PBCH的DMRS的序列,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000018
为Q值,占用2-bits,取值{1,2,4,8}。UE通过解调主信息块(master information block,MIB)获取
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000019
当候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000020
上的实际SSB位置(l)满足公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000021
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000022
时,gNB会在满足公式的候选位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000023
上发送相同的SSB位置(l)。对UE来说,其对应同一个SSB位置,UE可使用同一个下行接收波束接收满足公式的SSB位置(l)。
That is, when communicating on the shared frequency band, for the same SSB, the network device can send the SSB in the direction of one or more downlink transmit beams with an associated relationship, so as to improve the access success rate of the terminal device. Wherein, the terminal device determines different SSB positions through a parameter indicating the SSB position, and determines the association relationship between different SSB positions through the association parameter between the SSB positions. Specifically, considering that the actual transmission SSB position (1) can be in multiple candidate positions
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000014
The system introduces the concept of quasi co-location (QCL), through the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000015
or
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000016
express,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000017
represents the sequence of DMRS in SSB mapped to PBCH,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000018
is the Q value, occupies 2-bits, and takes the value {1, 2, 4, 8}. The UE obtains by demodulating the master information block (MIB)
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000019
When candidate SSB location
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000020
The actual SSB position on (l) satisfies the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000021
or
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000022
When , the gNB will be in the candidate position that satisfies the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000023
send the same SSB position (l) on the For the UE, it corresponds to the same SSB position, and the UE can use the same downlink receive beam to receive the SSB position (1) that satisfies the formula.
需要说明的是,本实施例及后续实施例中,满足公式“A mod B”,用于表示“A”可 以被“B”整除,或者表示“A”除以“B”的余数为0。例如,当A取值为16时,B取值为1/2/4/8/16时,确定A和B满足公式“A mod B”,显然,当B取值为3/5/6/7/9/10/11时,确定A和B不满足公式“A mod B”。It should be noted that, in this embodiment and subsequent embodiments, the formula "A mod B" is satisfied, which is used to indicate that "A" can be divisible by "B", or that the remainder of "A" divided by "B" is 0. For example, when the value of A is 16 and the value of B is 1/2/4/8/16, it is determined that A and B satisfy the formula "A mod B". Obviously, when the value of B is 3/5/6/ On 7/9/10/11, it is determined that A and B do not satisfy the formula "A mod B".
为便于说明
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000024
和(l)的关系,假设
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000026
5ms内具有QCL关系(QCLed)的候选SSB示意图如附图3所示。在该图示中,DRS窗口的长度为5ms,第一行的#0~#19表示候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000027
当Q=4,第二行中,图案相同的候选SSB位置为QCLed的候选SSB位置。例如,图案相同的候选SSB位置#0、候选SSB位置#4、候选SSB位置#8、候选SSB位置#12、候选SSB位置#16为QCLed的候选SSB位置;又如,图案相同的候选SSB位置#3、候选SSB位置#7、候选SSB位置#11、候选SSB位置#15、候选SSB位置#19为QCLed的候选SSB位置。对UE来说,可使用同一个下行接收波束在接收来自不同候选位置上图案相同的SSB。
For ease of explanation
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000024
and (l), assuming
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000026
A schematic diagram of candidate SSBs with a QCL relationship (QCLed) within 5 ms is shown in FIG. 3 . In this illustration, the length of the DRS window is 5ms, and #0 to #19 in the first row represent candidate SSB positions
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000027
When Q=4, in the second row, the candidate SSB positions with the same pattern are the candidate SSB positions of QCLed. For example, candidate SSB position #0, candidate SSB position #4, candidate SSB position #8, candidate SSB position #12, and candidate SSB position #16 with the same pattern are QCLed candidate SSB positions; another example, candidate SSB positions with the same pattern #3, candidate SSB position #7, candidate SSB position #11, candidate SSB position #15, and candidate SSB position #19 are the candidate SSB positions of QCLed. For the UE, the same downlink receive beam can be used to receive SSBs with the same pattern from different candidate positions.
针对图2的示例,在引入LBT时,其示例图附图4所示。在图4中,当LBT在第一个组内的候选SSB位置#21处LBT成功,即SSB位置#1~#5因为LBT失败无法发送,如果使用Rel-16NRU***中的循环方式,组#1中参数“inOneGroup”变成“11101010”,而其它组中参数“inOneGroup”也可能即将发生改变。即,当网络设备发送的SSB数量较多,需要以SSB组的形式发送SSB时,例如,当发送的SSB的数量为64时,每个组内参数“inOneGroup”将会发生改变,以至于UE无法进行合适的速率匹配。此外,由于该关联参数仅仅指示不同SSB位置之间的关联关系,容易导致终端设备解调SSB失败,增大终端设备接入时延,影响通信效率。For the example of FIG. 2 , when LBT is introduced, its example diagram is shown in FIG. 4 . In Figure 4, when LBT is successful at candidate SSB position #21 in the first group, that is, SSB positions #1 to #5 cannot be sent due to LBT failure, if the round-robin method in the Rel-16NRU system is used, group # The parameter "inOneGroup" in 1 becomes "11101010", and the parameter "inOneGroup" in other groups may also be about to change. That is, when the network device sends a large number of SSBs and needs to send SSBs in the form of SSB groups, for example, when the number of SSBs sent is 64, the parameter "inOneGroup" in each group will change, so that the UE Unable to do proper rate matching. In addition, since the association parameter only indicates the association relationship between different SSB positions, it is easy to cause the terminal device to fail to demodulate the SSB, increase the access delay of the terminal device, and affect the communication efficiency.
为了解决上述问题,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法及相关设备,用于提升终端设备解调SSB的成功率,在初始接入过程中,缩短了终端设备初始接入的接入时延,提高了初始接入的可靠性,从而提升通信效率。In order to solve the above problems, the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and related equipment, which are used to improve the success rate of terminal equipment to demodulate SSB, and shorten the access delay of the terminal equipment's initial access during the initial access process. , which improves the reliability of initial access and improves communication efficiency.
请参阅图5,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,包括如下步骤。Referring to FIG. 5 , an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including the following steps.
S101、网络设备确定多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置。S101. The network device determines the SSB group positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks.
本实施例中,网络设备在步骤S101中确定多个候选SSB组位置,其中,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系。In this embodiment, the network device determines a plurality of candidate SSB group positions in step S101, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在多个候选SSB组位置中,至少两个候选SSB具有该关联关系之外,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有该关联关系,其中,该至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。In a possible implementation manner, among the multiple candidate SSB group positions, at least two candidate SSB positions have the association relationship, and at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein , the at least two candidate SSB positions are respectively located in different candidate SSB groups among the at least two candidate SSB group positions.
需要说明的是,本实施例及后续实施例中,候选SSB组中包括一个或多个候选SSB,每一个候选SSB用于表示网络设备发送SSB的机会,换句话说,网络设备有机会在候选SSB对应的资源上发送SSB。相对应的,对于终端设备而言,可以基于候选SSB接收SSB。在不同的实施方式中,候选SSB也可以称为“候选SSB位置”,或者“候选SSB索引”,或者“候选位置”;候选SSB组也可以称为“候选SSB组位置”,或者“候选SSB组索引”,或者“候选组位置”。以下,以“候选SSB组位置”和“候选SSB位置”为例进行说明。It should be noted that, in this embodiment and subsequent embodiments, the candidate SSB group includes one or more candidate SSBs, and each candidate SSB is used to indicate an opportunity for the network device to send an SSB. The SSB is sent on the resource corresponding to the SSB. Correspondingly, for the terminal device, the SSB may be received based on the candidate SSB. In different embodiments, candidate SSBs may also be referred to as "candidate SSB positions", or "candidate SSB indices", or "candidate positions"; candidate SSB groups may also be referred to as "candidate SSB group positions", or "candidate SSB positions" group index", or "candidate group position". Hereinafter, the "candidate SSB group position" and the "candidate SSB position" will be described as examples.
具体地,网络设备在步骤S104发送SSB之前,通过步骤S101中首先确定需要发送的SSB所在的多个候选SSB组位置,其中,多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系。该关联关系具体可以包括准共址(quasi co-location,QCL)关系。Specifically, before sending the SSB in step S104, the network device first determines, in step S101, multiple candidate SSB group positions where the SSB to be sent is located, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship . The association relationship may specifically include a quasi co-location (QCL) relationship.
在步骤S101中,网络设备可以根据当前通信的频段、当前通信的信道占用比(channel occupancy ratio,CR)、信道忙碌比(channel busy ratio,CBR)等网络参数在步骤S101中确定多个候选SSB组位置;网络设备也可以根据预制的配置信息、核心网设备或者其它网络设备的指示信息在步骤S101中确定多个候选SSB组位置,或者是通过其它的方式确定,此处不做限定。In step S101, the network device may determine multiple candidate SSBs in step S101 according to network parameters such as the frequency band of the current communication, the channel occupancy ratio (CR) of the current communication, and the channel busy ratio (CBR), etc. Group location; the network device may also determine multiple candidate SSB group locations in step S101 according to prefabricated configuration information, core network device or other network device indication information, or determine by other means, which is not limited here.
示例性的,以图2所示SSB的发送方式为例。网络设备确定多个候选SSB组位置并通过参数“groupPresence”表示,在该图示中,参数“groupPresence”的取值为“10101011”,且参数“groupPresence”中取值为“1”的位置指示需要发送包含SSB的组,即在该候选SSB组需要发送SSB。Illustratively, take the sending manner of the SSB shown in FIG. 2 as an example. The network device determines the positions of multiple candidate SSB groups and expresses them by the parameter "groupPresence". In this figure, the value of the parameter "groupPresence" is "10101011", and the value of "1" in the parameter "groupPresence" indicates the position The group containing the SSB needs to be sent, that is, the SSB needs to be sent in the candidate SSB group.
S102、网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息。S102. The network device sends first indication information to the terminal device.
本实施例中,网络设备在步骤S102中向终端设备发送第一指示信息,其中,该第一指示信息用于指示步骤S101中所确定的多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置。相应的,终端设备在步骤S102中接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息。结合图2,即网络设备向终端设备指示在组位置为0、2、4、6或7的候选SSB组位置向终端设备发送SSB,相应地,终端可以在上述位置接收SSB。In this embodiment, the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device in step S102, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positions of the multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups determined in step S101. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device in step S102. Referring to FIG. 2 , the network device indicates to the terminal device to send the SSB to the terminal device at the candidate SSB group position whose group position is 0, 2, 4, 6 or 7. Accordingly, the terminal can receive the SSB at the above-mentioned position.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
具体地,该第一指示信息具体可以通过物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS序列对应的比特来联合表示,即该第一指示信息可以通过物理广播信道PBCH负载中的比特和/或表示解调参考信号DMRS序列的比特实现。其中,该第一指示信息对应的总比特数可以为n个,其中,该n为4、5或7,或者是其它的取值,例如3、6、8等,且n的不同的取值可以对应于第一指示信息所指示多个候选SSB组位置的候选SSB组对应的不同数量。示例性地,当n取值为3时,第一指示信息可以通过物理广播信道PBCH负载中的任意3-bits表示,或者,第一指示信息也可以通过DMRS序列对应的3-bits表示,或者是通过物理广播信道PBCH负载和DMRS序列联合表示。Specifically, the first indication information may be expressed jointly by the physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or the bits corresponding to the DMRS sequence of the demodulation reference signal, that is, the first indication information may be expressed by the bits in the physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or the bits corresponding to the DMRS sequence of the demodulation reference signal. Or represents the bit realization of the demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence. The total number of bits corresponding to the first indication information may be n, where n is 4, 5, or 7, or other values, such as 3, 6, 8, etc., and different values of n The number of candidate SSB groups corresponding to the multiple candidate SSB group positions indicated by the first indication information may be different. Exemplarily, when n is 3, the first indication information can be represented by any 3-bits in the PBCH load of the physical broadcast channel, or the first indication information can also be represented by the 3-bits corresponding to the DMRS sequence, or It is expressed jointly by the physical broadcast channel PBCH load and the DMRS sequence.
相应的,终端设备在步骤S102中接收得到第一指示信息之后,可以根据第一指示信息所包含的PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS的不同实现,确定多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置。下面将通过具体的示例,对终端设备根据第一指示信息的不同实现确定多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置的过程进行描述,在如下示例中,以Z表示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置。其中,作为一种可能的实现方式,对于候选组位置Z的表示方式,可通过如下几种方式中的至少一种进行表示:Correspondingly, after the terminal device receives the first indication information in step S102, it can determine the SSB group positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks according to the PBCH load and/or the different implementations of the demodulation reference signal DMRS contained in the first indication information. . The following will describe the process for the terminal device to determine the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups according to different implementations of the first indication information through specific examples. In the following example, Z is used to represent the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups . Wherein, as a possible implementation manner, the representation of the candidate group position Z can be represented by at least one of the following manners:
一、当第一指示信息通过4-bits表示时,终端设备可以确定在一个DRS窗口(或者一个半帧或者一个SS burst set周期)内有最多16个候选组位置(比如取值{10,11,12,13,14,15,16}之一或者多个时)。其中,通过4-bits表示的实现方式具体包括以下任意一项:1. When the first indication information is represented by 4-bits, the terminal device can determine that there are at most 16 candidate group positions (such as the value {10, 11) within one DRS window (or one half frame or one SS burst set period). , 12, 13, 14, 15, 16} one or more). Wherein, the implementation represented by 4-bits specifically includes any of the following:
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000028
+指示DMRS序列中的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000028
+ indicates 3-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000029
+指示DMRS序列中的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000029
+ indicates 3-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000030
+指示DMRS序列中的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000030
+ indicates 3-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000031
+指示DMRS序列中的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000031
+ indicates 3-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000032
+指示DMRS序列中的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000032
+ indicates 3-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000033
+指示DMRS序列中的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000033
+ indicates 3-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000034
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000034
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000035
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000035
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000036
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000036
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000037
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000037
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000038
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000038
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000039
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000039
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000040
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000040
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000041
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000041
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000042
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000042
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000043
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000043
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000044
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000044
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000045
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000045
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000046
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000046
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000047
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000047
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000048
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000048
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000049
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000049
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000050
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000050
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000051
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000051
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000052
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000052
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000053
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000053
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000054
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000054
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000055
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000055
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000056
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000056
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000057
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000057
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000058
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000058
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000059
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000059
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000060
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000060
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000061
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000061
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000062
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000062
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000063
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000063
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000064
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000064
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000065
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000065
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000066
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000066
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000067
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000067
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000068
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000068
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000069
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000069
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000070
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000070
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000071
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000071
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000072
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000072
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000073
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000073
其中,“任意2-bits”还可以包括DMRS序列中的高阶位2-bits或DMRS序列中的低阶位2-bits;“任意1-bits”还可以包括DMRS序列中的高阶位1-bits或DMRS序列中的低阶位1-bits。Wherein, "any 2-bits" can also include high-order 2-bits in the DMRS sequence or low-order 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; "any 1-bits" can also include high-order bits 1 in the DMRS sequence -bits or low-order 1-bits in the DMRS sequence.
二、当第一指示信息通过5-bits表示时,终端设备可以确定在一个DRS窗口(或者一个半帧或者一个SS burst set周期)内有最多32个候选组位置(比如取值{17~31,包括20}之一或者多个时)。其中,通过5-bits表示的实现方式具体包括以下任意一项:2. When the first indication information is represented by 5-bits, the terminal device can determine that there are at most 32 candidate group positions (such as values {17-31) within one DRS window (or one half frame or one SS burst set period). , including one or more of 20}). The implementation represented by 5-bits specifically includes any of the following:
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000074
+指示DMRS序列的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000074
+ 3-bits indicating the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000075
+指示DMRS序列的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000075
+ 3-bits indicating the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000076
+指示DMRS序列的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000076
+ 3-bits indicating the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000077
+指示DMRS序列的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000077
+ 3-bits indicating the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000078
+指示DMRS序列的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000078
+ 3-bits indicating the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000079
+指示DMRS序列的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000079
+ 3-bits indicating the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000080
+指示DMRS序列的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000080
+ 3-bits indicating the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000081
+指示DMRS序列的3-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000081
+ 3-bits indicating the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000082
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000082
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000083
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000083
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000084
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000084
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000085
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000085
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000086
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000086
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000087
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000087
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000088
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000088
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000089
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000089
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000090
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000090
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000091
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000091
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000092
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000092
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000093
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000093
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000094
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000094
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000095
+指示DMRS序列中的任意2-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000095
+ indicates any 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000096
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000096
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000097
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000097
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000098
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000098
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000099
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000099
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000100
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000100
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000101
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000101
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000102
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000102
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000103
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000103
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000104
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000104
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000105
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000105
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000106
+指示DMRS序列中的任意1-bits;或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000106
+ indicates any 1-bits in the DMRS sequence; or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000107
或,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000107
or,
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000108
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000108
其中,“任意2-bits”还可以包括DMRS序列中的高阶位2-bits或DMRS序列中的低阶位2-bits;“任意1-bits”还可以包括DMRS序列中的高阶位1-bits或DMRS序列中的低阶位1-bits。Wherein, "any 2-bits" can also include high-order 2-bits in the DMRS sequence or low-order 2-bits in the DMRS sequence; "any 1-bits" can also include high-order bits 1 in the DMRS sequence -bits or low-order 1-bits in the DMRS sequence.
三、终端设备也可通过指示候选SSB位置的配置参数中隐含获取得到第一指示信息,即第一指示信息可以通过指示候选SSB位置的配置参数实现。其中,在一个DRS窗口(或者一个半帧或者一个SS burst set周期)内,候选SSB位置可通过“
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000109
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000110
+指示DMRS序列中的3-bits”,共计7-bits表示。
3. The terminal device can also obtain the first indication information implicitly through the configuration parameter indicating the position of the candidate SSB, that is, the first indication information can be realized by the configuration parameter indicating the position of the candidate SSB. Among them, within a DRS window (or a half frame or a SS burst set period), the candidate SSB position can be passed through "
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000109
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000110
+ Indicates 3-bits in the DMRS sequence", a total of 7-bits are represented.
此时,终端设备可以通过候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000111
中左起第一、第二和第三位的低阶位的3比特,即
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000112
来表示候选组位置。比如,当UE解调出的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000113
时,表示UE解调出的候选SSB位置为#1,对应的候选组位置为#0;当UE解调出的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000114
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000115
时,表示UE解调出的候选SSB位置为#15,对应的候选组位置为#1;当UE解调出的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000116
时,表示UE解调出的候选候选SSB位置为#15,对应的候选组位置为#9。
At this point, the terminal device can pass the candidate SSB location
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000111
The 3 bits of the low-order bits of the first, second, and third bits from the left in the middle, i.e.
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000112
to represent the candidate group position. For example, when the UE demodulates the
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000113
, it indicates that the candidate SSB position demodulated by the UE is #1, and the corresponding candidate group position is #0;
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000114
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000115
, it means that the candidate SSB position demodulated by the UE is #15, and the corresponding candidate group position is #1;
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000116
, it indicates that the candidate candidate SSB position demodulated by the UE is #15, and the corresponding candidate group position is #9.
S103、网络设备向终端设备发送第二指示信息。S103. The network device sends second indication information to the terminal device.
本实施例中,网络设备在步骤S103中向终端设备发送第二指示信息,其中,该第二指示信息用于确定步骤S102中第一指示信息所指示的多个候选SSB组位置中,至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系。相应的,终端设备在步骤S103中接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息。In this embodiment, the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device in step S103, where the second indication information is used to determine at least two of the multiple candidate SSB group positions indicated by the first indication information in step S102, at least two The association relationship of each candidate SSB group position. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device in step S103.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备在步骤S101确定得到的多个候选SSB组位置中,至少两个候选SSB组位置存在的关联关系,可以存在多种实现方式,此时,第二指示信息可以通过不同的参数,以确定该关联关系的多种实现方式。例如,当至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置时,该第二指示信息可以用于指示该第一候选SSB组位置和该第二候选SSB组位置之间具有该关联关系;和/或,当至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第三候选SSB组位置和第四候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息可以用于指示该第三候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和该第二候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有该关联关系。In a possible implementation manner, among the multiple candidate SSB group positions determined by the network device in step S101, the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group positions may exist in multiple implementation manners. In this case, the second indication Information can be passed through different parameters to determine multiple implementations of the association. For example, when the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, the second indication information may be used to indicate the first candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position and/or, when at least two candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, the second indication information may be used to indicate the third candidate SSB group position There is the association relationship between at least one candidate SSB position in the second candidate SSB group position and at least one candidate SSB position in the second candidate SSB group position.
具体地,用于确定多个候选SSB组位置中,至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系的第二指示信息可以存在多种实现方式。该第二指示信息具体可以指示至少两个候选SSB组位置中的不同SSB组之间关联关系,和/或,该第二指示信息具体可以指示至少两个候选SSB组位置中的不同SSB组所包含的至少一个候选SSB位置之间的关联关系。终端设备可以在不同的实现场景中使用对应的实现方式,根据该第二指示信息确定出至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系。Specifically, the second indication information used to determine the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group positions among the multiple candidate SSB group positions may be implemented in various manners. The second indication information may specifically indicate the association relationship between different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions, and/or the second indication information may specifically indicate that the different SSB groups in the at least two candidate SSB group positions The relationship between the included at least one candidate SSB location. The terminal device may use corresponding implementation manners in different implementation scenarios, and determine the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions according to the second indication information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以不执行步骤S103接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,而通过其它方式获取得到第二指示信息,例如通过在预存于终端设备的存储模块中进行读取得到第二指示信息,或者是终端设备在侧行链路通信中接收其它的终端设备的信息中得到第二指示信息,还可以是其它的实现方式,此处不做限定。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may not perform step S103 to receive the second indication information from the network device, but obtain the second indication information in other ways, for example, by reading in a storage module pre-stored in the terminal device Obtaining the second indication information, or obtaining the second indication information by the terminal device receiving information of other terminal devices in the sidelink communication, may also be other implementation manners, which are not limited here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在步骤S103中,终端设备接收来自该网络设备的第二指示信息之后,终端设备可以根据该第二指示信息确定该关联关系。具体地,终端设备可以根据来自网络设备的第二指示信息确定多个候选SSB组位置中,至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系,即终端设备可以依据网络设备的指示确定该关联关系,使得终端设备可以与网络设备对齐该关联关系的配置。In a possible implementation manner, in step S103, after the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device, the terminal device may determine the association relationship according to the second indication information. Specifically, the terminal device can determine, according to the second indication information from the network device, the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group positions among the multiple candidate SSB group positions, that is, the terminal device can determine the association relationship according to the indication of the network device. , so that the terminal device can align the configuration of the association relationship with the network device.
进一步地,该终端设备还可以根据该第二指示信息和第三指示信息确定该关联关系,其中,该第三指示信息包括该多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置(即第一指示信息)、多个候选SSB位置、多个SSB组位置和/或SSB数量。具体地,终端设备可以进一步根据第二指示信息和第三指示信息,确定多个候选SSB组位置中,至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系,其中,第三指示信息具体可以包括在一个或多个监听窗口中多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置(即第一指示信息)、多个候选SSB位置、多个SSB组位置和/或SSB数量。由于该第三指示信息指示在一个或多个监听窗口中SSB或SSB组的信息,即终端设备在该关联关系的确定过程中,使用第三指示信息和第二指示信息联合确定,可以优化该关联关系的确定过程。Further, the terminal device may also determine the association relationship according to the second indication information and the third indication information, wherein the third indication information includes the positions of the multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB group (ie the first indication information), Multiple candidate SSB locations, multiple SSB group locations, and/or number of SSBs. Specifically, the terminal device may further determine the association relationship between at least two candidate SSB group positions among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the second indication information and the third indication information, wherein the third indication information may be specifically included in the Multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions (ie, first indication information), multiple candidate SSB positions, multiple SSB group positions and/or SSB numbers in one or more listening windows. Since the third indication information indicates the information of the SSB or SSB group in one or more listening windows, that is, the terminal device uses the third indication information and the second indication information to jointly determine in the process of determining the association relationship, it is possible to optimize the The process of determining the relationship.
此外,该第二指示信息对应的比特数可以为m个,其中,该m为2或3,或者是其它的取值,例如1、4、5等,且m的不同的取值可以对应于第二指示信息所指示关联关系的不同实现方式。In addition, the number of bits corresponding to the second indication information may be m, where m is 2 or 3, or other values, such as 1, 4, 5, etc., and different values of m may correspond to Different implementations of the association relationship indicated by the second indication information.
下面将通过具体的示例对第二指示信息的不同实现过程进行描述,对于第二指示信息的实现方式,可通过如下几种方式中的至少一种进行表示:The following will describe different implementation processes of the second indication information through specific examples. The implementation manner of the second indication information can be represented by at least one of the following manners:
一、定义Q 1值为第二指示信息,其取值{1,2,4,8}。 1. Define the value of Q 1 as the second indication information, which takes values {1, 2, 4, 8}.
本实施例中,用于表示循环移位(cyclically shift)的组,不同SSB位置所在的候选组位置或者候选SSB位置具有QCL关系,对应参数“groupPresence”,即第二指示信息可以通过无线资源管理(radio resource control,RRC)信令配置,通过MIB参数中的2-bits表示,其表示方法如下之一:In this embodiment, it is used to indicate a cyclically shifted group, and the candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions where different SSB positions are located have a QCL relationship, and the corresponding parameter "groupPresence", that is, the second indication information can be managed by the radio resource (radio resource control, RRC) signaling configuration, which is represented by 2-bits in MIB parameters, and its representation method is one of the following:
a)“公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon”+“同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset”中1-bit的低比特;a) The lower bits of 1-bit in "common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon" + "synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset";
b)“物理下行控制信道-信息块类型1配置pdcch-ConfigSIB1”中的2-bits,例如通过 如下三种方式表示:b) 2-bits in "Physical Downlink Control Channel-Information Block Type 1 Configuration pdcch-ConfigSIB1", for example, expressed in the following three ways:
1)“控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero”中的2-bits,比如2-bits的高比特或者2-bits的低比特或者任意2-bits;1) 2-bits in "control resource set zero controlResourceSetZero", such as high bits of 2-bits or low bits of 2-bits or any 2-bits;
2)“搜索空间零searchSpaceZero”中的2-bits,比如2-bits的高比特或者2-bits的低比特或者任意2-bits;2) 2-bits in "search space zero searchSpaceZero", such as high bits of 2-bits or low bits of 2-bits or any 2-bits;
3)“控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero”和“搜索空间零searchSpaceZero”中各取1-bit,共计2-bits每个参数中取得的1-bit可以是高阶位比特,也可以是低阶位比特,也可以任意1-bit。3) "Control Resource Set Zero controlResourceSetZero" and "Search Space Zero searchSpaceZero" each take 1-bit, a total of 2-bits The 1-bit obtained in each parameter can be a high-order bit or a low-order bit. , or any 1-bit.
其中,subCarrierSpacingCommon表示指示信息块类型1配置(SIB1),(消息2/消息4)msg2/4,寻呼(paging)以及其它***消息(system information,SI)信息所使用的子载波间隔;此外,对于工作在非授权频段上的***,其可以用于表示指示Q值的其中一个比特;Among them, subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
ssb-SubcarrierOffset表示SSB中频域最低子载波与重叠(overlap)的公共资源块(common resource block,CRB)中频域最低子载波之间子载波的偏移;ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
pdcch-ConfigSIB1,包含参数控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)#0和参数搜索空间(SearchSpace)#0的参数和,用来指示相关类型0-物理下行控制信道(type0-PDCCH)的配置参数;pdcch-ConfigSIB1, including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
controlResourceSetZero表示用来配置CORESET#0的参数;controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
searchSpaceZero表示用来搜索CORESET#0的SearchSpace#0的参数。searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
对于基于QCL的SSB组的概念,在一个或者跨(多个)DRS窗口内候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上,具有QCL关系的组满足公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000117
或(X mod Q 1)或者(Z mod Q 1)。其中,第三指示信息中的多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置(即第一指示信息)通过Z表示、第三指示信息中的SSB数量通过
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000118
表示、第三指示信息中的多个SSB组位置(或多个组位置)通过X表示。其中,X可以通过如下两种之一或者联合表示:
For the concept of QCL-based SSB groups, at candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions within one or across (multiple) DRS windows, groups with QCL relationships satisfy the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000117
or (X mod Q 1 ) or (Z mod Q 1 ). Wherein, the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups in the third indication information (that is, the first indication information) are represented by Z, and the number of SSBs in the third indication information is represented by
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000118
Indicates that multiple SSB group positions (or multiple group positions) in the third indication information are represented by X. Among them, X can be represented by one or a combination of the following two:
i)PBCH负载中的3个比特
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000119
表示,
i) 3 bits in PBCH payload
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000119
express,
ii)PBCH DMRS序列的3-bits表示。ii) 3-bit representation of the PBCH DMRS sequence.
二、新增定义Q 1值,其取值{8,16,24,64}。 2. Newly define the value of Q1, which takes the value {8, 16, 24, 64}.
本实施例中,用于表示循环移位(cyclically shift)的SSB位置(l),由参数“groupPresence”和参数“inOneGroup”联合指示,即第二指示信息通过RRC信令配置,通过MIB参数中的2-bits表示,其表示方法如下之一:In this embodiment, the SSB position (1) used to indicate the cyclic shift (cyclically shift) is jointly indicated by the parameter "groupPresence" and the parameter "inOneGroup", that is, the second indication information is configured through RRC signaling, and is passed through the MIB parameter. The 2-bits representation of , which is represented by one of the following methods:
a)“公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon”+“同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset”中1-bit的低比特;a) The lower bits of 1-bit in "common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon" + "synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset";
b)“物理下行控制信道-信息块类型1配置pdcch-ConfigSIB1”中的2-bits,例如通过如下三种方式表示:b) 2-bits in "Physical Downlink Control Channel-Information Block Type 1 Configuration pdcch-ConfigSIB1", for example, expressed in the following three ways:
1)“控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero”中的2-bits,比如2-bits的高比特或者2-bits的低比特或者任意2-bits;1) 2-bits in "control resource set zero controlResourceSetZero", such as high bits of 2-bits or low bits of 2-bits or any 2-bits;
2)“搜索空间零searchSpaceZero”中的2-bits,比如2-bits的高比特或者2-bits的低比 特或者任意2-bits;2) 2-bits in "search space zero searchSpaceZero", such as high bits of 2-bits or low bits of 2-bits or any 2-bits;
3)“控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero”和“搜索空间零searchSpaceZero”中各取1-bit,共计2-bits每个参数中取得的1-bit可以是高阶位比特,也可以是低阶位比特,也可以任意1-bit。3) "Control Resource Set Zero controlResourceSetZero" and "Search Space Zero searchSpaceZero" each take 1-bit, a total of 2-bits The 1-bit obtained in each parameter can be a high-order bit or a low-order bit. , or any 1-bit.
其中,subCarrierSpacingCommon表示指示信息块类型1配置(SIB1),(消息2/消息4)msg2/4,寻呼(paging)以及其它***消息(system information,SI)信息所使用的子载波间隔;此外,对于工作在非授权频段上的***,其可以用于表示指示Q值的其中一个比特;Among them, subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
ssb-SubcarrierOffset表示SSB中频域最低子载波与重叠(overlap)的公共资源块(common resource block,CRB)中频域最低子载波之间子载波的偏移;ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
pdcch-ConfigSIB1,包含参数控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)#0和参数搜索空间(SearchSpace)#0的参数和,用来指示相关类型0-物理下行控制信道(type0-PDCCH)的配置参数;pdcch-ConfigSIB1, including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
controlResourceSetZero表示用来配置CORESET#0的参数;controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
searchSpaceZero表示用来搜索CORESET#0的SearchSpace#0的参数。searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
此时,对于Q1值,分别表示两种集合:{1,2,4,8}和{8,16,24,64}。对于终端设备来说,通过在位于不同频点上的同步栅栏(sync raster)搜索SSB位置时隐含获取Q1的集合。比如,当终端设备在频点5.020GHz左右搜索到合适SSB位置时,Q1的值为{1,2,4,8};当终端设备在频点60GHz左右搜索到合适SSB时,Q1的值为{8,16,24,64},如下表1(指示Q1值与频点关系)所示。At this time, for the Q1 value, two sets are respectively represented: {1, 2, 4, 8} and {8, 16, 24, 64}. For the terminal equipment, the set of Q1 is implicitly obtained when searching for the SSB position through the synchronization fence (sync raster) located on different frequency points. For example, when the terminal device searches for a suitable SSB position around 5.020GHz, the value of Q1 is {1, 2, 4, 8}; when the terminal device searches for a suitable SSB at around 60GHz, the value of Q1 is {8, 16, 24, 64}, as shown in Table 1 below (indicating the relationship between Q1 values and frequency points).
表1Table 1
频点Frequency Q 1 Q1 value
小于等于7GHz(或小于等于6GHz)Less than or equal to 7GHz (or less than or equal to 6GHz) {1,2,4,8}{1, 2, 4, 8}
大于7GHz(或大于6GHz)Greater than 7GHz (or greater than 6GHz) {8,16,24,64}{8, 16, 24, 64}
三、定义Q 1取值为{1,2,4,8,16,32,64}。 3. Define Q 1 as {1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64}.
本实施例中,用于表示循环移位的SSB位置,即不同SSB及其所在的组位置,在满足公式的候选SSB位置上或者候选组位置上具有QCL关系,即第二指示信息通过RRC信令配置,通过MIB参数中的3-bits表示,其表示方法如下之一:In this embodiment, the SSB positions used to indicate the cyclic shift, that is, different SSBs and their group positions, have a QCL relationship at the candidate SSB positions or the candidate group positions that satisfy the formula, that is, the second indication information is transmitted through the RRC signal. The command configuration is represented by 3-bits in the MIB parameter, and its representation method is one of the following:
a)“公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon”(1-bit)+“同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset”(任意1-bit)+“控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero”(任意1-bit);a) "common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon" (1-bit) + "synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset" (any 1-bit) + "control resource set zero controlResourceSetZero" (any 1-bit);
b)“公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon”(1-bit)+“同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset”(任意1-bit)+“搜索空间零searchSpaceZero”(任意1-bit);b) "common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon" (1-bit) + "synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset" (any 1-bit) + "search space zero searchSpaceZero" (any 1-bit);
c)“公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon”(1-bit)+“控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero”(任意2-bit);c) "common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon" (1-bit) + "control resource set zero controlResourceSetZero" (any 2-bit);
d)“公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon”(1-bit)+“搜索空间零searchSpaceZero”(任意2-bit);d) "common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon" (1-bit) + "search space zero searchSpaceZero" (any 2-bit);
e)“同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset”(任意1-bit)+“控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero”(任意2-bit);e) "synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset" (any 1-bit) + "control resource set zero controlResourceSetZero" (any 2-bit);
f)“同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset”(任意1-bit)+“搜索空间零searchSpaceZero”(任意2-bit);f) "synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset" (any 1-bit) + "search space zero searchSpaceZero" (any 2-bit);
g)“控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero”(任意2-bits)+“搜索空间零searchSpaceZero”(任意1-bit);g) "control resource set zero controlResourceSetZero" (any 2-bits) + "search space zero searchSpaceZero" (any 1-bit);
h)“控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero”中的任意3-bits;h) Any 3-bits in "controlResourceSetZero";
i)“搜索空间零searchSpaceZero”(任意2-bits)+“控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero”(任意1-bit);i) "search space zero searchSpaceZero" (any 2-bits) + "control resource set zero controlResourceSetZero" (any 1-bit);
j)“搜索空间零searchSpaceZero”中的任意3-bits。j) Any 3-bits in "searchSpaceZero".
其中,参数“controlResourceSetZero”和“searchSpaceZero”皆位于“pdcch-ConfigSIB1”中。“任意1-bit”还包括参数“ssb-SubcarrierOffset”、“controlResourceSetZero”或“searchSpaceZero”中的高阶位1-bit或者低阶位1-bit;“任意2-bits”还包括参数“controlResourceSetZero”或“searchSpaceZero”中的高阶位2-bits或者低阶位2-bits;“任意3-bits”还包括参数“controlResourceSetZero”或“searchSpaceZero”中的高阶位3-bits或者低阶位3-bits。The parameters "controlResourceSetZero" and "searchSpaceZero" are both located in "pdcch-ConfigSIB1". "Any 1-bit" also includes the high-order 1-bit or low-order 1-bit in the parameters "ssb-SubcarrierOffset", "controlResourceSetZero" or "searchSpaceZero"; "Any 2-bits" also includes the parameter "controlResourceSetZero" Or high-order 2-bits or low-order 2-bits in "searchSpaceZero"; "any 3-bits" also includes high-order 3-bits or low-order 3-bits in parameter "controlResourceSetZero" or "searchSpaceZero" bits.
其中,subCarrierSpacingCommon表示指示信息块类型1配置(SIB1),(消息2/消息4)msg2/4,寻呼(paging)以及其它***消息(system information,SI)信息所使用的子载波间隔;此外,对于工作在非授权频段上的***,其可以用于表示指示Q值的其中一个比特;Among them, subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
ssb-SubcarrierOffset表示SSB中频域最低子载波与重叠(overlap)的公共资源块(common resource block,CRB)中频域最低子载波之间子载波的偏移;ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
pdcch-ConfigSIB1,包含参数控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)#0和参数搜索空间(SearchSpace)#0的参数和,用来指示相关类型0-物理下行控制信道(type0-PDCCH)的配置参数;pdcch-ConfigSIB1, including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
controlResourceSetZero表示用来配置CORESET#0的参数;controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
searchSpaceZero表示用来搜索CORESET#0的SearchSpace#0的参数。searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
具体地,上述第二指示信息的不同取值可以对应得到不同的Q 1的值,比如,“000”表示的Q 1的值为“1”,“001”表示的Q 1的值为“2”,依次类推。该取值和网络设备发送的SSB位置个数有关,比如参数“ServingCellConfigCommon”中的“ssb-PositionsInBurst”,当在“ssb-PositionsInBurst”中配置的参数为“shortBitmap”时,表示网络设备在一个时间段内(比如5ms的半帧或一个SS burst set),最多只能发送4个SSBs,当在“ssb-PositionsInBurst”中配置的参数为“mediumBitmap”时,表示网络设备在一个时间段内(比如5ms的半帧或一个SS burst set),最多只能发送8个SSBs。针对以上两种情况,一种实现方式是,参数“ServingCellConfigCommonSIB”中的“ssb-PositionsInBurst”的参数“groupPresence”可配置成“10000000”,即只有一个组内的SSB能够发送出来,此时Q 1表示用于计算具有QCL关系的SSB位置,且SSB位置的个数不大于8。 Specifically, different values of the above-mentioned second indication information can correspond to different values of Q 1 , for example, the value of Q 1 represented by "000" is "1", and the value of Q 1 represented by "001" is "2"",And so on. The value is related to the number of SSB positions sent by the network device, such as "ssb-PositionsInBurst" in the parameter "ServingCellConfigCommon". Within a segment (such as a 5ms half-frame or an SS burst set), only 4 SSBs can be sent at most. When the parameter configured in "ssb-PositionsInBurst" is "mediumBitmap", it means that the network device is in a period of time (such as 5ms half frame or an SS burst set), only a maximum of 8 SSBs can be sent. For the above two situations, an implementation method is that the parameter "groupPresence" of "ssb-PositionsInBurst" in the parameter "ServingCellConfigCommonSIB" can be configured to "10000000", that is, only one SSB in a group can be sent out. At this time, Q 1 Indicates that it is used to calculate the SSB positions with QCL relationship, and the number of SSB positions is not more than 8.
当在“ssb-PositionsInBurst”中配置的参数为“longBitmap”时,表示网络设备在一个时间段内(比如5ms的半帧或一个SS burst set),最多只能发送64个SSBs。此时,参数“ServingCellConfigCommonSIB”中“ssb-PositionsInBurst”中参数“groupPresence”值为“1”的数量大于1。其中,参数Q 1的表示方式有如下三种含义: When the parameter configured in "ssb-PositionsInBurst" is "longBitmap", it means that the network device can only send a maximum of 64 SSBs within a time period (such as a 5ms half frame or an SS burst set). At this time, the number of the parameter "groupPresence" value "1" in "ssb-PositionsInBurst" in the parameter "ServingCellConfigCommonSIB" is greater than 1. Among them, the representation of parameter Q 1 has the following three meanings:
i){1,2,4,8}表示用于计算获取不同候选组位置上具有QCL关系的组位置;i) {1, 2, 4, 8} indicates that the group positions with QCL relationship on different candidate group positions are obtained by calculation;
ii){16,32,64}表示用于计算获取不同候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上具有QCL关系的SSB位置;ii) {16, 32, 64} indicates that it is used to calculate and obtain SSB positions with QCL relationship on different candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions;
iii){1,2,4,8,16,32,64}表示用于计算获取不同候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上具有QCL关系的SSB位置。iii) {1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64} represents the SSB positions used to calculate and obtain different candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions with a QCL relationship.
具体地,可以通过公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000120
或(X mod Q 3)或(Z mod Q 3)确定具有QCL关系的SSB组位置,Q 3为Q 1中的低阶位3-bits或者高阶位3-bits,Y为通过PBCH payload中的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000121
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000122
和3-bits的DMRS序列,共计6-bits表示的数值。其中,第三指示信息中的多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置(即第一指示信息)通过Z表示、第三指示信息中的SSB数量通过
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000123
表示、第三指示信息中的多个SSB组位置(或多个SSB组位置)通过X表示。
Specifically, through the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000120
Or (X mod Q 3 ) or (Z mod Q 3 ) to determine the position of the SSB group with the QCL relationship, Q 3 is the low-order 3-bits or high-order 3-bits in Q 1 , and Y is the PBCH payload. of
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000121
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000122
And the DMRS sequence of 3-bits, a total of 6-bits represents the value. Wherein, the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups in the third indication information (that is, the first indication information) are represented by Z, and the number of SSBs in the third indication information is represented by
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000123
Indicates that multiple SSB group positions (or multiple SSB group positions) in the third indication information are represented by X.
此外,可以通过公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000124
或(Y mod Q 4)获取满足具有QCL关系的SSB位置,Y为通过PBCH payload中的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000125
和3-bits的DMRS序列,共计6-bits表示的数值,Q 4为Q 1中表示{16,32,64}的三位比特,取值为{16,32,64},比如低阶位3-bits或者高阶位3-bits;或者Q 4即为Q 1
In addition, the formula can be
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000124
Or (Y mod Q 4 ) to obtain the SSB position that satisfies the QCL relationship, and Y is passed through the PBCH payload
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000125
And the DMRS sequence of 3-bits, a total of 6-bits represents the value, Q 4 is the three bits of Q 1 representing {16, 32, 64}, the value is {16, 32, 64}, such as low-order bits 3-bits or high-order 3-bits; or Q 4 is Q 1 .
S104、网络设备根据关联关系在多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB。S104: The network device sends the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship.
S105、终端设备根据所述第一指示信息和所述关联关系在监听窗口内检测SSB。S105. The terminal device detects the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
本实施例中,网络设备在步骤S104中根据关联关系在多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB。相应的,终端设备在步骤S105中可以根据步骤S102接收得到的第一指示信息和至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系,在监听窗口内检测SSB。In this embodiment, in step S104, the network device sends the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship. Correspondingly, in step S105, the terminal device may detect the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information received in step S102 and the association relationship between the positions of the at least two candidate SSB groups.
需要说明的是,对于终端设备在步骤S105中所使用的的关联关系,由步骤S103的描述可知,终端设备可以通过多种方式获取得到第二指示信息,并通过该第二指示信息确定至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系,而不仅仅局限于步骤S103中的获取方式。本实施例中以终端设备通过步骤S103获取得到第二指示信息的实现方式为例进行说明。It should be noted that, for the association relationship used by the terminal device in step S105, it can be seen from the description of step S103 that the terminal device can obtain the second indication information in various ways, and determine at least two indications through the second indication information. The association relationship of each candidate SSB group position is not limited to the acquisition method in step S103 . In this embodiment, an implementation manner in which the terminal device obtains the second indication information through step S103 is used as an example for description.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在步骤S104中,多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置所具有的关联关系可以存在多种实现方式,此时,网络设备也可以通过多种实现方式发送SSB。In a possible implementation manner, in step S104, there may be multiple implementation manners for the association relationship of at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions. The implementation sends the SSB.
例如,当多个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,且该第一候选SSB组位置和该第二候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系时,在步骤S104中,网络设备根据该关联关系在该多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB的过程可以包括:该网络设备在该第一候选SSB组位置前进行LBT;如果LBT失败,则该网络设备在该第二候选组SSB位置发送该SSB。其中,网络设备在发送SSB之前需要进 行LBT,如果网络设备在第一候选SSB组位置进行LBT失败,则该网络设备在与该第一候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系的第二候选SSB组位置发送SSB,使得由于LBT失败在第一候选SSB组位置未发送的SSB在第二候选SSB组位置发送。For example, when the multiple candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the first candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position have the association, in step S104 , the process that the network device sends the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship may include: the network device performs LBT before the first candidate SSB group position; if the LBT fails, then The network device sends the SSB at the second candidate group SSB location. The network device needs to perform LBT before sending the SSB. If the network device fails to perform LBT at the first candidate SSB group position, the network device is at the second candidate SSB group position that has the association relationship with the first candidate SSB group position. SSBs are sent so that SSBs not sent at the first candidate SSB group position due to LBT failure are sent at the second candidate SSB group position.
又如,当多个候选SSB组位置包括第三候选SSB组位置和第四候选SSB组位置,其中,该第三候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB位置,该第四候选SSB位置包括第二候选SSB位置,且该第三候选SSB组位置和该第四候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系,该第一SSB位置和该第二SSB位置具有该关联关系时,在步骤S104中,网络设备根据该关联关系在该多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB的过程可以包括:该网络设备在该第一候选SSB位置进行LBT;如果LBT失败,则该网络设备在该第二候选SSB位置发送该SSB。其中,网络设备在发送SSB之前需要进行LBT,如果网络设备在第三候选SSB组位置中的第一候选SSB位置进行LBT失败,则该网络设备在与该第三候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系的第四候选SSB组位置中,与该第一候选SSB位置具有该关联关系的第二候选SSB位置发送SSB,使得由于LBT失败在第一候选SSB位置未发送的SSB在第二候选SSB位置发送。For another example, when the multiple candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, wherein the third candidate SSB group position includes the first candidate SSB position, and the fourth candidate SSB group position includes the second candidate SSB group position The candidate SSB position, and the third candidate SSB group position and the fourth candidate SSB group position have the association relationship, and the first SSB position and the second SSB position have the association relationship, in step S104, the network device according to The process of sending the SSB in at least one candidate SSB group position of the plurality of candidate SSB group positions in the association relationship may include: the network device performs LBT at the first candidate SSB position; if the LBT fails, the network device performs LBT at the first candidate SSB group position; Two candidate SSB locations send the SSB. The network device needs to perform LBT before sending the SSB. If the network device fails to perform LBT at the first candidate SSB position in the third candidate SSB group position, the network device has the association relationship with the third candidate SSB group position. In the fourth candidate SSB group position, the second candidate SSB position that has the association relationship with the first candidate SSB position sends the SSB, so that the SSB that is not sent at the first candidate SSB position due to the LBT failure is sent at the second candidate SSB position. .
下面将通过具体的示例对网络设备在步骤S104中的发送方式进行描述。The sending manner of the network device in step S104 will be described below by using a specific example.
方式一、LBT成功所在SSB组内实际发送的SSB图样不发生改变。Mode 1: The SSB pattern actually sent in the SSB group where the LBT succeeds does not change.
在该实现方式中,候选SSB组将以循环移位的方式出现在一个或者跨(多个)DRS窗口内的候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上,每个组位置内实际发送的SSB位置(即参数“inOneGroup”)虽也会跟随所在组的循环移位出现循环移位,也具有QCL关系,但每个组位置内的SSB图样、网络设备发送的方式、顺序等依旧不变,即参数“inOneGroup”内的SSB图样不变。In this implementation, candidate SSB groups will appear in a cyclic shift at candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions within one or across (multiple) DRS windows, and the actually transmitted SSB positions within each group position (ie, Although the parameter "inOneGroup") will also follow the cyclic shift of the group in which it belongs, it also has a QCL relationship, but the SSB pattern in each group position, the method and order of network device transmission, etc. remain unchanged, that is, the parameter " The SSB pattern in inOneGroup" remains unchanged.
当LBT发生在某个候选组位置(候选组位置Z)内,且gNB在该候选组位置内LBT成功占用信道。When LBT occurs in a certain candidate group position (candidate group position Z), and the gNB successfully occupies the channel by LBT in the candidate group position.
对于LBT成功所在组之前的SSB--从gNB角度来说,该候选组位置之前如果存在需要在其它候选组位置上发送的SSB位置(比如参数“GroupPresence”置为“1”),则之前的这些候选组位置在满足QCL关系的候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上将组内的SSB位置全部发送出来,即所发送的组位置(X)在候选组位置(Z)上以循环移位的方式出现。从UE的角度来说,它在满足QCL关系的候选组位置监听组内的SSB位置,或者在满足QCL关系的候选SSB位置上检测SSB位置。For the SSB before the group where the LBT succeeds - from the gNB point of view, if there is an SSB position that needs to be sent on other candidate group positions before the candidate group position (for example, the parameter "GroupPresence" is set to "1"), then the previous These candidate group positions send all the SSB positions in the group at the candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions that satisfy the QCL relationship, that is, the sent group position (X) is cyclically shifted on the candidate group position (Z). Appear. From the UE's point of view, it monitors the SSB positions within the group at the candidate group positions satisfying the QCL relationship, or detects the SSB positions at the candidate SSB positions satisfying the QCL relationship.
对于LBT成功所在组的SSB--LBT成功发生在的某个候选组位置(Z),对于gNB来说,它所发送的组位置(X)将以循环移位的方式出现,当gNB在某个候选组位置内LBT成功占用信道之后,该候选组位置内的SSB位置不会发送,而是在满足QCL关系的候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上发送SSB位置。从UE的角度来说,它在满足QCL关系的候选组位置监听组内的SSB位置,或者在满足QCL关系的候选SSB位置上检测SSB位置。For the SSB of the group where the LBT succeeds—a candidate group position (Z) where the LBT successfully occurs, for the gNB, the group position (X) it sends will appear in a cyclic shift. When the gNB is in a certain group position (Z) After the LBT in each candidate group position successfully occupies the channel, the SSB position in the candidate group position will not be sent, but the SSB position will be sent at the candidate group position or the candidate SSB position that satisfies the QCL relationship. From the UE's point of view, it monitors the SSB positions within the group at the candidate group positions satisfying the QCL relationship, or detects the SSB positions at the candidate SSB positions satisfying the QCL relationship.
在该实现方式中,每个组位置内实际发送的SSB位置图样、个数和SSB位置的相对位置保持不变。In this implementation manner, the actually sent SSB position pattern, number and relative position of the SSB positions in each group position remain unchanged.
以图6为例,首先对图6所示各类方框所示内容进行说明。假设一个DRS窗口(或者 一个半帧或者一个SS burst set周期)为5ms,在5ms的监听窗口内网络设备以图2所示方式(“groupPresence=10101011,inOneGroup=10101011”)在阴影块#0~#19上发送SSB。在阴影块#0~#19上,参数groupPresence=10101011指示在#0~#19上的#0、#2、#4、#6、#7、#8、#10、#12、#14、#15、#16、#18等多个位置为网络设备可能发送的SSB组位置;在每一个阴影块#0~#19内部,参数inOneGroup=10101011指示在任意一个阴影块的多个SSB组位置内网络设备可能发送的SSB位置。以#0为例,其包括虚线框#0-7对应的SSB位置,参数inOneGroup=10101011指示在#0所示虚线框#0-7位置上网络设备可能发送的SSB位置,其中,虚线框#0-7的SSB位置可以如图6中加粗虚线框所示。Taking FIG. 6 as an example, the contents of the various blocks shown in FIG. 6 will be described first. Assuming that a DRS window (or a half-frame or a SS burst set period) is 5ms, within the 5ms listening window, the network device is in the shaded block #0~ Send SSB on #19. On the shaded blocks #0 to #19, the parameter groupPresence=10101011 indicates #0, #2, #4, #6, #7, #8, #10, #12, #14, #15, #16, #18 and other locations are the SSB group locations that may be sent by network devices; within each shaded block #0 to #19, the parameter inOneGroup=10101011 indicates multiple SSB group locations in any shaded block The location of the SSB that the internal network device may send. Taking #0 as an example, it includes the SSB position corresponding to the dotted frame #0-7, and the parameter inOneGroup=10101011 indicates the SSB position that the network device may send at the position of the dotted frame #0-7 shown in #0, wherein the dotted frame# The SSB positions of 0-7 can be shown as bold dashed boxes in FIG. 6 .
此外,由此前图2所示描述可知,此处以网络设备在5ms窗口内发送的SSB数量最大为64为例,即可能存在两个或三个相同的空白框#0~#7,例如在图示中存在三个相同的空白框#0、#1、#2、#3,存在两个相同的空白框#4、#5、#6、#7。其中,相同的空白框表示所发送的SSB位置相同,比如,空白框#0对应的虚线框#0-7、#64-71、#128-135对应的SSB位置所承载的SSB相同;又如,空白框#5对应的虚线框#40-47、#104-111对应的SSB位置所承载的SSB相同。In addition, from the previous description shown in Figure 2, it can be seen that the maximum number of SSBs sent by the network device in the 5ms window is 64 as an example, that is, there may be two or three identical blank boxes #0~#7, for example, in Figure There are three identical blank boxes #0, #1, #2, #3 in the display, and two identical blank boxes #4, #5, #6, #7. Among them, the same blank box indicates that the transmitted SSB positions are the same, for example, the SSB positions carried by the SSB positions corresponding to the dotted boxes #0-7, #64-71, and #128-135 corresponding to the blank box #0 are the same; , the SSBs carried by the SSB positions corresponding to the dotted boxes #40-47 and #104-111 corresponding to the blank box #5 are the same.
当网络设备通过图6的方式执行步骤S104时,假设候选组位置#0和候选组位置#8,以及候选组位置#2和候选组位置#10满足某种QCL关系。LBT发生在候选组位置#2内,该候选组位置内的{候选SSB位置#16~候选SSB位置#23}上的SSB都将不会发送出来,而在满足QCL关系的候选组位置上(如候选组位置#10)上发送候选组位置#2上组位置#2内的所有SSB位置。即在候选SSB位置{候选SSB位置#80~候选SSB位置#87}上发送参数“inOneGroup”中配置为“1”的SSB位置。对于候选组位置#0上组位置#0内的SSB位置,它将在满足QCL关系的候选SSB位置#8上的候选SSB位置上发送SSB,或者在满足QCL关系的候选SSB位置上发送SSB位置。对于其它组位置内需要发送的SSB位置,根据LBT类型以及剩余占用的信道占用时间(channel occupancy time,COT)长度在候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上发送其它组位置内的SSB位置。When the network device performs step S104 in the manner of FIG. 6 , it is assumed that the candidate group position #0 and the candidate group position #8, and the candidate group position #2 and the candidate group position #10 satisfy a certain QCL relationship. LBT occurs in candidate group position #2, SSBs in {candidate SSB position #16 ~ candidate SSB position #23} in this candidate group position will not be sent, but in the candidate group position that satisfies the QCL relationship ( For example, on candidate group position #10), all SSB positions within group position #2 on candidate group position #2 are sent. That is, the SSB positions configured as "1" in the parameter "inOneGroup" are sent in the candidate SSB positions {candidate SSB position #80 to candidate SSB position #87}. For SSB positions within group position #0 on candidate group position #0, it will send the SSB on the candidate SSB position on candidate SSB position #8 that satisfies the QCL relationship, or the SSB position on the candidate SSB position that satisfies the QCL relationship . For the SSB positions that need to be sent in other group positions, according to the LBT type and the remaining occupied channel occupancy time (channel occupancy time, COT) length, the SSB positions in the other group positions are sent at the candidate group position or the candidate SSB position.
相应地,当网络设备通过图6所示方式执行步骤S104时,终端设备在步骤S105中可以根据步骤S102接收得到的第一指示信息以及步骤S103接收得到的第二指示信息检测网络设备所发送的SSB。对于UE来说,在一个或者跨(多个)DRS窗口内,具有QCL关系的组位置内的SSB位置具有QCL关系。同时,在一个DRS窗口内,在一个服务小区内实际发送的组的数量将不大于Q 1,实际发送的SSB(l)的数量将不大于Q 2,且包含相同SSB位置(l)的组的数量以及具有相同SSB位置(l)的数量都不大于1。(The UE assumes that within a discovery burst transmission window,a number of transmitted group index on a serving cell is not larger than Q 1and a number of transmitted group index contains the same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one,a number of transmitted SS/PBCH block index on a serving cell is not larger than Q 2and a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks with a same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one.) Correspondingly, when the network device executes step S104 in the manner shown in FIG. 6 , the terminal device can detect, in step S105, the first indication information received by the network device and the second indication information received by the step S103. SSB. For the UE, within one or across DRS window(s), SSB locations within a group location with a QCL relationship have a QCL relationship. At the same time, within a DRS window, the number of groups actually sent in a serving cell will not be greater than Q 1 , and the number of SSBs (l) actually sent will be no greater than Q 2 , and include groups with the same SSB position (l). The number of and the number with the same SSB position (l) is neither greater than 1. (The UE assumes that within a discovery burst transmission window, a number of transmitted group index on a serving cell is not larger than Q 1 and a number of transmitted group index contains the same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one, a number of transmitted SS/PBCH block index on a serving cell is not larger than Q 2 and a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks with a same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one.)
此外,终端设备在步骤S105中可以根据第二指示信息所确定的不同的关联关系,对应检测SSB,下面将详细描述。In addition, the terminal device may detect the SSB correspondingly according to the different association relationships determined by the second indication information in step S105, which will be described in detail below.
一、当终端设备在步骤S103中确定第二指示信息对应Q 1值的取值{1,2,4,8}时。 1. When the terminal device determines in step S103 that the second indication information corresponds to the value {1, 2, 4, 8} of the Q 1 value.
对于UE来说,其认为满足公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000126
或(X mod Q 1)或者(Z mod Q 1)的候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上的组位置具有QCL关系,且该组位置内发送的SSB位置(l)相同,UE在满足公式的候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上检测SSB。
For the UE, it considers that the formula is satisfied
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000126
The candidate group position of either (X mod Q 1 ) or (Z mod Q 1 ) or the group position on the candidate SSB position has a QCL relationship, and the SSB position (1) sent in the group position is the same, and the UE is in the candidate group that satisfies the formula. SSBs are detected at group positions or candidate SSB positions.
对于在候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000127
上具有QCL关系的SSB位置(l)的QCL关系,UE通过公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000128
或(Y mod Q 2)计算获取,Y为通过PBCH payload中的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000129
和3-bits的DMRS序列,共计6-bits表示的数值,Q 2满足Q 2=8×Q 1。即,对于UE来说,可使用同一个下行接收波束接收在不同候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000130
上满足公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000131
或(Y mod Q 2)的SSB位置。
For candidate SSB locations
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000127
The QCL relationship of the SSB position (1) with the QCL relationship on the UE through the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000128
Or (Y mod Q 2 ) calculated and obtained, Y is obtained through the PBCH payload
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000129
and a 3-bits DMRS sequence, totaling a value represented by 6-bits, Q 2 satisfies Q 2 =8×Q 1 . That is, for the UE, the same downlink receive beam can be used to receive at different candidate SSB positions
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000130
satisfy the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000131
or the SSB position of (Y mod Q 2 ).
二、当终端设备在步骤S103中确定第二指示信息对应Q 1值的取值{8,16,24,64}时。 2. When the terminal device determines in step S103 that the second indication information corresponds to the value {8, 16, 24, 64} of the Q 1 value.
在一个或者多个DRS窗口内的不同候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上,具有QCL关系的SSB位置(l)满足公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000132
或(Y mod Q 1)计算获取。其中,第三指示信息中的SSB数量通过
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000133
表示、第三指示信息中的多个SSB位置通过Y表示。
At different candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions within one or more DRS windows, the SSB positions (l) with QCL relationship satisfy the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000132
Or (Y mod Q 1 ) calculation to obtain. Among them, the number of SSBs in the third indication information passes through
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000133
Indicates that multiple SSB positions in the third indication information are represented by Y.
具体地,Y可以为通过PBCH payload中的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000134
和3-bits的DMRS序列,共计6-bits表示的数值。针对不同SSB位置(l)所在的组位置的QCL关系,终端设备和网络设备可以通过公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000135
或(X mod Q 2)或者(Z mod Q 2)计算获取,其中
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000136
其中,第三指示信息中的多个SSB组位置(或多个组位置)通过X表示,X可以通过如下两种之一或者联合表示:
Specifically, Y can be passed through the PBCH payload
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000134
And the DMRS sequence of 3-bits, a total of 6-bits represents the value. For the QCL relationship of the group positions where the different SSB positions (l) are located, the terminal device and the network device can use the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000135
or (X mod Q 2 ) or (Z mod Q 2 ), where
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000136
Wherein, the multiple SSB group positions (or multiple group positions) in the third indication information are represented by X, and X can be represented by one of the following two or a combination:
i)PBCH负载中的3个比特
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000137
表示,
i) 3 bits in PBCH payload
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000137
express,
ii)PBCH DMRS序列的3-bits表示。ii) 3-bit representation of the PBCH DMRS sequence.
即,对于UE来说,可使用同一个下行接收波束接收在不同候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000138
上满足公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000139
或(Y mod Q 1)的SSB位置。
That is, for the UE, the same downlink receive beam can be used to receive at different candidate SSB positions
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000138
satisfy the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000139
or the SSB position of (Y mod Q 1 ).
三、当终端设备在步骤S103中确定第二指示信息对应Q 1值的取值{1,2,4,8,16,32,64}时。 3. When the terminal device determines in step S103 that the second indication information corresponds to the value {1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64} of the Q 1 value.
gNB和UE通过公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000140
或(X mod Q 3)或(Z mod Q 3)获取满足具有QCL关系的组位置,Q 3为Q 1中的低阶位3-bits或者高阶位3-bits,Y为通过PBCH payload中的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000141
和3-bits的DMRS序列,共计6-bits表示的数值。Z为候选组位置,X为组位置。
gNB and UE pass the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000140
Or (X mod Q 3 ) or (Z mod Q 3 ) to obtain the group position that satisfies the QCL relationship, Q 3 is the low-order 3-bits or high-order 3-bits in Q 1 , and Y is the PBCH payload. of
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000141
And the DMRS sequence of 3-bits, a total of 6-bits represents the value. Z is the candidate group position and X is the group position.
gNB和UE通过公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000142
或(Y mod Q 4)获取满足具有QCL关系的SSB位置,Y为通过PBCH payload中的
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000143
和3-bits的DMRS序列,共计6-bits表示的数值,Q 4为Q 1中表示{16,32,64}的三位比特,取值为{16,32,64},比如低阶位3-bits或者高阶位3-bits;或者Q 4即为Q 1
gNB and UE pass the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000142
Or (Y mod Q 4 ) to obtain the SSB position that satisfies the QCL relationship, and Y is passed through the PBCH payload
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000143
And the DMRS sequence of 3-bits, a total of 6-bits represents the value, Q 4 is the three bits of Q 1 representing {16, 32, 64}, the value is {16, 32, 64}, such as low-order bits 3-bits or high-order 3-bits; or Q 4 is Q 1 .
即,对于UE来说,可使用同一个下行接收波束接收在不同候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000144
上满足公式
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000145
或(Y mod Q 4)的SSB位置。
That is, for the UE, the same downlink receive beam can be used to receive at different candidate SSB positions
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000144
satisfy the formula
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000145
or the SSB position of (Y mod Q 4 ).
对应于方式一所示实施例,引入了具有QCL关系的组的概念,UE根据基于组的QCL关系,可以准确的获取实际SSB的发送位置,以方便做好速率匹配。Corresponding to the embodiment shown in the first mode, the concept of a group with a QCL relationship is introduced, and the UE can accurately obtain the actual SSB sending position according to the group-based QCL relationship, so as to facilitate rate matching.
方式二、LBT成功所在SSB组内,以及其它SSB组内实际发送的SSB图样发生改变。Mode 2: The SSB group in which the LBT succeeds is located, and the SSB pattern actually sent in other SSB groups changes.
在该实施例中,候选SSB组位置将以循环移位的方式出现在一个或者跨(多个)DRS窗口内的候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上,每个组位置内实际发送的SSB位置(即参数“inOneGroup”)也会跟随组位置的循环移位出现循环移位,也具有QCL关系,每个组位置内的SSB图样或网络设备发送的方式也会随之改变。即同时对组位置(参数“GroupPresence”)和组位置内实际发送的SSB位置(参数“InOneGroup”)进行循环移位。In this embodiment, candidate SSB group positions will appear in a cyclic shift at candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions within one or across (multiple) DRS windows, and the actually transmitted SSB positions in each group position ( That is, the parameter "inOneGroup") will also follow the cyclic shift of the group position, and it also has a QCL relationship. The SSB pattern in each group position or the transmission method of the network device will also change accordingly. That is, the group position (parameter "GroupPresence") and the actually sent SSB position (parameter "InOneGroup") in the group position are cyclically shifted at the same time.
当LBT发生在某个候选组位置(候选组位置Z)内,且gNB在该候选组位置内LBT成功 占用信道。When LBT occurs in a certain candidate group position (candidate group position Z), and the gNB successfully occupies the channel by LBT in the candidate group position.
对于LBT成功所在组之前的SSB--从gNB角度来说,该候选组位置之前如果存在需要在其它候选组位置上发送的SSB位置(比如参数“GroupPresence”置为“1”),则之前的这些候选组位置在满足QCL关系的选组位置或者候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000146
上将组内的SSB位置全部发送出来,即所发送的组位置(X)在候选组位置(Z)上以循环移位的方式出现。
For the SSB before the group where the LBT succeeds - from the gNB point of view, if there is an SSB position that needs to be sent on other candidate group positions before the candidate group position (for example, the parameter "GroupPresence" is set to "1"), then the previous These candidate group positions are in the selected group positions or candidate SSB positions that satisfy the QCL relationship
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000146
All the SSB positions in the group are sent out, that is, the sent group position (X) appears in the form of cyclic shift on the candidate group position (Z).
对于LBT成功所在组的SSB--LBT成功发生在的某个候选组位置(Z),对于gNB来说,它所发送的组位置将以循环移位的方式在多个候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上出现,这些候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上发送的组位置相同,即满足QCL关系。同时,每个组位置内实际发送的SSB位置,都会基于LBT所在候选组位置上的SSB实际发送情况以及改变。此时,gNB发送组位置的个数大于参数“GroupPresence”中比特置为“1”的个数。For the SSB of the group where the LBT is successful--a candidate group position (Z) where the LBT successfully occurs, for the gNB, the group position sent by it will be in multiple candidate group positions or candidate SSBs in a cyclic shift manner appear in the position, the group positions sent at these candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions are the same, that is, the QCL relationship is satisfied. At the same time, the actually sent SSB position in each group position will be based on the actual sending situation and change of the SSB at the candidate group position where the LBT is located. At this time, the number of group positions sent by the gNB is greater than the number of bits set to "1" in the parameter "GroupPresence".
以图7为例,其中,图7中各类方框所示内容可以参考前述图6中各类方框所示内容的说明,此处不再赘述。如下图7所示,“GroupPresence=10101011”,即有5个组位置的SSB位置将会被发送出来,此时,gNB根据QCL关系,在不同候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上发送的同一个组位置至少需要两次,即在该图7中第#2和第#10的候选组位置上,都能够发送出组位置为#2内的SSB位置。Taking FIG. 7 as an example, for the content shown in various blocks in FIG. 7 , reference may be made to the description of the content shown in the various blocks in FIG. 6 , which will not be repeated here. As shown in Figure 7 below, "GroupPresence=10101011", that is, SSB positions with 5 group positions will be sent. At this time, the gNB sends the same group at different candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions according to the QCL relationship. The position needs to be at least twice, that is, at the candidate group positions of #2 and #10 in FIG. 7 , the SSB position within the group position of #2 can be sent.
此外,每个候选组位置上的组位置内实际发送的SSB位置也将在其所在组位置位于其它多个候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上出现。当gNB在某个候选组位置内LBT成功占用信道之后,该候选组位置上LBT成功之后的SSB位置将会发送出来,但是该组位置内LBT成功所处的时间点之前的SSB位置将会在满足QCL关系的候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上发送。但是,每个组位置内实际发送的SSB位置图样、索引个数和SSB位置的相对位置保持不变。In addition, the actually transmitted SSB position in the group position on each candidate group position will also appear when the group position where the group position is located is located in other multiple candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions. When the gNB successfully occupies the channel by LBT in a candidate group position, the SSB position after the successful LBT in the candidate group position will be sent, but the SSB position in the group position before the time point when the LBT is successful will be in It is sent at the candidate group position or the candidate SSB position that satisfies the QCL relationship. However, the actually transmitted SSB position pattern, the number of indices and the relative positions of the SSB positions within each group position remain unchanged.
当网络设备通过图7的方式执行步骤S104时,LBT发生在候选组位置#2内,该组位置内的候选SSB位置#0~候选SSB位置#5上的SSB位置因LBT失败无法成功发送出来,候选SSB位置#6和候选SSB位置#7上的SSB则可以成功发送出来。此时,对于在{候选组位置#0,候选组位置#2,候选组位置#4,候选组位置#6和候选组位置#7}上的组位置,其组内的{候选SSB位置#22,候选SSB位置#23},{候选SSB位置#38,候选SSB位置#39},{候选SSB位置#54,候选SSB位置#55},{候选SSB位置#62,候选SSB位置#63}等上面的SSB位置都可以发送出来。而在满足QCL关系的{候选组位置#8,候选组位置#10,候选组位置#12,候选组位置#14和候选组位置#15},因为与{候选组位置#0,候选组位置#2,候选组位置#4,候选组位置#6和候选组位置#7}对应同一个组位置,因此,{候选组位置#8,候选组位置#10,候选组位置#12,候选组位置#14和候选组位置#15}组内发送的SSB位置分别为({候选SSB位置#64,候选SSB位置#66,候选SSB位置#68,候选SSB位置#70,候选SSB位置#71},{候选SSB位置#80,候选SSB位置#82,候选SSB位置#84},{候选SSB位置#96,候选SSB位置#98,候选SSB位置#100},{候选SSB位置#112,候选SSB位置#114,候选SSB位置#116},{候选SSB位置#120,候选SSB位置#122,候选SSB位置#124})等上面的SSB位置都可以发送出来。When the network device performs step S104 in the manner of FIG. 7 , the LBT occurs in the candidate group position #2, and the SSB positions in the candidate SSB position #0 to the candidate SSB position #5 in the group position cannot be successfully sent out due to the LBT failure. , the SSBs at candidate SSB position #6 and candidate SSB position #7 can be successfully sent. At this time, for the group positions at {candidate group position #0, candidate group position #2, candidate group position #4, candidate group position #6 and candidate group position #7}, {candidate SSB position # within the group 22, candidate SSB position #23}, {candidate SSB position #38, candidate SSB position #39}, {candidate SSB position #54, candidate SSB position #55}, {candidate SSB position #62, candidate SSB position #63} Wait until the above SSB location can be sent out. And in the {candidate group position #8, candidate group position #10, candidate group position #12, candidate group position #14 and candidate group position #15} that satisfy the QCL relationship, because the same as {candidate group position #0, candidate group position #15} #2, candidate group position #4, candidate group position #6 and candidate group position #7} correspond to the same group position, so {candidate group position #8, candidate group position #10, candidate group position #12, candidate group position #12 Position #14 and candidate group position #15} The SSB positions sent within the group are respectively ({candidate SSB position #64, candidate SSB position #66, candidate SSB position #68, candidate SSB position #70, candidate SSB position #71} , {candidate SSB location #80, candidate SSB location #82, candidate SSB location #84}, {candidate SSB location #96, candidate SSB location #98, candidate SSB location #100}, {candidate SSB location #112, candidate SSB location Position #114, candidate SSB position #116}, {candidate SSB position #120, candidate SSB position #122, candidate SSB position #124}) and other SSB positions above can be sent.
图7所示过程可以简单概括为:对于每个组位置内实际发送的SSB位置。在前8个候选组位置上,网络设备只会在候选组位置上的最后两个候选SSB位置上发送SSB位置。在后8个候选组位置上,gNB发送每个组位置中其它候选SSB位置上剩余的SSB位置。The process shown in FIG. 7 can be simply summarized as: for the actually transmitted SSB location within each group location. On the first 8 candidate group positions, the network device will only transmit the SSB positions on the last two candidate SSB positions on the candidate group positions. At the last 8 candidate group positions, the gNB transmits the remaining SSB positions over the other candidate SSB positions in each group position.
相应地,当网络设备通过图7所示方式执行步骤S104时,终端设备在步骤S105中可以根据步骤S102接收得到的第一指示信息以及步骤S103接收得到的第二指示信息检测网络设备所发送的SSB。具体地,对于UE来说,在一个或者跨(多个)DRS窗口内,具有QCL关系的组位置内的SSB位置具有QCL关系。同时,在一个DRS窗口内,在一个服务小区内实际发送的组的数量可大于Q 1,且包含相同SSB位置(l)的组的数量可大于1,实际发送的SSB(l)的数量将不大于Q 2,且组位置内实际发送的相同SSB位置(l)的数量不大于1。(The UE assumes that within a discovery burst transmission window,a number of transmitted group index on a serving cell can be larger than,and a number of transmitted group index provided by is“GroupPresence”can be larger than one,a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks on a serving cell is not larger than,and a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks with a same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one.) Correspondingly, when the network device executes step S104 in the manner shown in FIG. 7 , the terminal device may detect, in step S105, the first indication information received by the network device and the second indication information received by the step S103. SSB. Specifically, for the UE, within one or across DRS window(s), SSB locations within a group location with a QCL relationship have a QCL relationship. Meanwhile, within a DRS window, the number of groups actually sent in one serving cell may be greater than Q 1 , and the number of groups containing the same SSB position (1) may be greater than 1, and the number of actually sent SSBs (1) will be is not greater than Q2 , and the number of identical SSB locations (1) actually transmitted within a group location is not greater than 1. (The UE assumes that within a discovery burst transmission window, a number of transmitted group index on a serving cell can be larger than, and a number of transmitted group index provided by is “GroupPresence” can be larger than one, a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks on a serving cell is not larger than, and a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks with a same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one.)
此外,终端设备在步骤S105中可以根据第二指示信息所确定的不同的关联关系,对应检测SSB。具体来说,在终端设备在步骤S103中确定第二指示信息对应Q 1值的取值{1,2,4,8}、或者确定第二指示信息对应Q 1值的取值{8,16,24,64}、或者确定第二指示信息对应Q 1值的取值{1,2,4,8,16,32,64}的实现方式可以参考前述方式一中的实现过程,此处不再赘述。 In addition, in step S105, the terminal device may detect the SSB correspondingly according to the different association relationships determined by the second indication information. Specifically, in step S103, the terminal device determines the value {1, 2, 4, 8} of the Q 1 value corresponding to the second indication information, or determines the value {8, 16 of the Q 1 value corresponding to the second indication information , 24, 64}, or the implementation of determining the value {1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64} of the second indication information corresponding to the Q 1 value may refer to the implementation process in the foregoing method 1. Repeat.
对应于方式二所示实施例,引入了具有QCL关系的组位置的概念,其中,每个组位置内实际发送的SSB位置也会跟随LBT的结果在不同的候选组位置上发送。通过这种方法,可以准确的获取实际SSB位置的发送位置,以方便做好速率匹配。Corresponding to the embodiment shown in Manner 2, the concept of group positions with a QCL relationship is introduced, wherein the actually sent SSB positions in each group position are also sent in different candidate group positions following the LBT result. Through this method, the sending position of the actual SSB position can be accurately obtained, so as to facilitate rate matching.
方式三、LBT成功所在SSB组内实际发送的SSB图样发生改变。Mode 3: The SSB pattern actually sent in the SSB group where the LBT succeeds is changed.
在该实施例中,组位置将以循环移位的方式出现在一个或者跨(多个)DRS窗口内的候选组位置或者候选SSB位置上,每个组位置内实际发送的SSB位置(即参数“inOneGroup”)也会跟随组位置的循环移位出现循环移位,也具有QCL关系,LBT成功所在的候选组位置上内的SSB图样或网络设备发送的方式也会随之改变。In this embodiment, the group positions will appear in a cyclic shift at candidate group positions or candidate SSB positions within one or across (multiple) DRS windows, and the actually transmitted SSB positions (i.e. parameter "inOneGroup") also follows the cyclic shift of the group position, and also has a QCL relationship. The SSB pattern in the candidate group position where the LBT succeeds or the way the network device sends it will also change accordingly.
当LBT发生在某个候选组位置(候选组位置Z)内,且gNB在该候选组位置内LBT成功占用信道。When LBT occurs in a certain candidate group position (candidate group position Z), and the gNB successfully occupies the channel by LBT in the candidate group position.
对于LBT成功所在组之前的SSB--从gNB角度来说,该候选组位置之前如果存在需要在其它候选组位置上发送的SSB位置(比如参数“GroupPresence”置为“1”),则之前的这些候选组位置在满足QCL关系的选组位置或者候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000147
上将组内的SSB位置全部发送出来,即所发送的组位置(X)在候选组位置(Z)上以循环移位的方式出现。从UE的角度来说,它在满足QCL关系的候选组位置监听组内的SSB位置,或者在满足QCL关系的候选SSB位置上检测SSB位置。
For the SSB before the group where the LBT succeeds - from the gNB point of view, if there is an SSB position that needs to be sent on other candidate group positions before the candidate group position (for example, the parameter "GroupPresence" is set to "1"), then the previous These candidate group positions are in the selected group positions or candidate SSB positions that satisfy the QCL relationship
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000147
All the SSB positions in the group are sent out, that is, the sent group position (X) appears in the form of cyclic shift on the candidate group position (Z). From the UE's point of view, it monitors the SSB positions within the group at the candidate group positions satisfying the QCL relationship, or detects the SSB positions at the candidate SSB positions satisfying the QCL relationship.
对于LBT成功所在组的SSB--对于LBT成功的发生在某个候选组位置,在该候选组位置上的组位置中,LBT成功之前如果存在SSB位置需要发送(比如参数“InOneGroup”置为“1”),gNB在满足QCL关系的候选组位置上发送SSB位置,或者在候选SSB位置上发送SSB位置;而在该候选组位置上的组位置中,LBT成功之后如果存在SSB位置需要发送(比如参数“InOneGroup”置为“1”),gNB将在该候选组位置上的候选SSB位置发送SSB位置。从UE的角度来说,它在满足QCL关系的候选组位置监听组内的SSB位置,或者在满足 QCL关系的候选SSB位置上检测SSB位置。但是,每个组位置内实际发送的SSB位置图样、索引个数和SSB位置的相对位置保持不变。For the SSB of the group where the LBT is successful - for the LBT success that occurs in a candidate group position, in the group position on the candidate group position, if there is an SSB position before the LBT is successful, it needs to be sent (for example, the parameter "InOneGroup" is set to " 1"), the gNB sends the SSB position on the candidate group position that satisfies the QCL relationship, or sends the SSB position on the candidate SSB position; and in the group position on the candidate group position, after the LBT succeeds, if there is an SSB position, it needs to send ( For example, the parameter "InOneGroup" is set to "1"), the gNB will send the SSB position at the candidate SSB position on the candidate group position. From the UE's point of view, it monitors the SSB positions within the group at the candidate group positions satisfying the QCL relationship, or detects the SSB positions at the candidate SSB positions satisfying the QCL relationship. However, the actually transmitted SSB position pattern, the number of indices and the relative positions of the SSB positions within each group position remain unchanged.
以图8为例,其中,图8中各类方框所示内容可以参考前述图6中各类方框所示内容的说明,此处不再赘述。如下图8所示,“groupPresence=10101011,inOneGroup=10101011”。LBT发生在候选组位置#2上,候选组位置#0内也有SSB位置需要发送。此时,gNB在候选组位置#8上的候选SSB位置
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000148
发送具有相同组位置内的SSB位置或者相同SSB位置(l)的SSB。对于候选组位置#2内的SSB位置,网络设备在候选SSB位置#22和候选SSB位置#23上发送SSB位置。同时,在满足QCL关系的候选组位置上的候选SSB位置上发送其余因LBT失败而没有成功发送出来的SSB位置,比如在候选组#10上的{候选SSB位置#80,候选SSB位置#82,候选SSB位置#84}上发送SSB位置。其余候选组内候选SSB位置的SSB图样或发送顺序将不会发送变化。
Taking FIG. 8 as an example, for the content shown in various blocks in FIG. 8, reference may be made to the description of the content shown in the various blocks in FIG. 6, which will not be repeated here. As shown in Figure 8 below, "groupPresence=10101011, inOneGroup=10101011". LBT occurs at candidate group position #2, and there are also SSB positions within candidate group position #0 that need to be sent. At this time, the candidate SSB position of the gNB at the candidate group position #8
Figure PCTCN2020123396-appb-000148
SSBs with either the SSB position within the same group position or the same SSB position (1) are sent. For SSB locations within candidate set location #2, the network device transmits the SSB locations on candidate SSB location #22 and candidate SSB location #23. At the same time, send the remaining SSB positions that were not successfully sent due to LBT failure at the candidate SSB positions on the candidate group positions that satisfy the QCL relationship, such as {candidate SSB position #80, candidate SSB position #82 on candidate group #10 , the SSB position is sent on the candidate SSB position #84}. The SSB pattern or transmission order of the candidate SSB positions in the remaining candidate groups will not be changed.
图8所示过程可以简单概括为:只改变LBT成功所在组内实际发送的SSB位置,其它组位置内的SSB位置的发送方式不会发生变化。The process shown in FIG. 8 can be simply summarized as: only the SSB position actually sent in the group where the LBT is successful is changed, and the sending mode of the SSB position in other group positions will not change.
相应地,当网络设备通过图8所示方式执行步骤S104时,终端设备在步骤S105中可以根据步骤S102接收得到的第一指示信息以及步骤S103接收得到的第二指示信息检测网络设备所发送的SSB。具体地,对于UE来说,在一个或者跨(多个)DRS窗口内,具有QCL关系的组位置内的SSB位置具有QCL关系。同时,在一个DRS窗口内,在一个服务小区内实际发送的组的数量可大于Q 1,且包含相同SSB位置(l)的组的数量可大于1,实际发送的SSB(l)的数量将不大于Q 2,且组位置内实际发送的相同SSB位置(l)的数量不大于1。(The UE assumes that within a discovery burst transmission window,a number of transmitted group on a serving cell can be larger than Q 1,and a number of transmitted groups with a same group index provided by“GroupPresence”can be larger than one,a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks on a serving cell is not larger thanQ 2,and a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks with a same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one.) Correspondingly, when the network device performs step S104 in the manner shown in FIG. 8 , the terminal device can detect the data sent by the network device according to the first indication information received in step S102 and the second indication information received in step S103 in step S105 . SSB. Specifically, for the UE, within one or across DRS window(s), SSB locations within a group location with a QCL relationship have a QCL relationship. Meanwhile, within a DRS window, the number of groups actually sent in one serving cell may be greater than Q 1 , and the number of groups containing the same SSB position (1) may be greater than 1, and the number of actually sent SSBs (1) will be is not greater than Q2 , and the number of identical SSB locations (1) actually transmitted within a group location is not greater than 1. (The UE assumes that within a discovery burst transmission window, a number of transmitted group on a serving cell can be larger than Q 1 , and a number of transmitted groups with a same group index provided by “GroupPresence” can be larger than one, a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks on a serving cell is not larger than Q 2 ,and a number of transmitted SS/PBCH blocks with a same SS/PBCH block index is not larger than one.)
此外,终端设备在步骤S105中可以根据第二指示信息所确定的不同的关联关系,对应检测SSB。具体来说,在终端设备在步骤S103中确定第二指示信息对应Q 1值的取值{1,2,4,8}、或者确定第二指示信息对应Q 1值的取值{8,16,24,64}、或者确定第二指示信息对应Q 1值的取值{1,2,4,8,16,32,64}的实现方式可以参考前述方式一中的实现过程,此处不再赘述。 In addition, in step S105, the terminal device may detect the SSB correspondingly according to the different association relationships determined by the second indication information. Specifically, in step S103, the terminal device determines the value {1, 2, 4, 8} of the Q 1 value corresponding to the second indication information, or determines the value {8, 16 of the Q 1 value corresponding to the second indication information , 24, 64}, or the implementation of determining the value {1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64} of the second indication information corresponding to the Q 1 value may refer to the implementation process in the foregoing method 1. Repeat.
对应于方式三所示实施例,引入了具有QCL关系的组的概念,其中,LBT成功所在的候选组位置上发送的SSB位置根据LBT的结果在不同的候选组位置上发送。通过这种方法,可以准确的获取实际SSB位置的发送位置,以方便做好速率匹配。Corresponding to the embodiment shown in Manner 3, the concept of a group with a QCL relationship is introduced, wherein the SSB position sent at the candidate group position where the LBT succeeds is sent at different candidate group positions according to the LBT result. Through this method, the sending position of the actual SSB position can be accurately obtained, so as to facilitate rate matching.
本实施例中,网络设备首先确定多个候选SSB组位置,其中,多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;此后,网络设备在发送SSB的过程中,根据该关联关系在多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB。其中,网络设备基于不同SSB组之间的关联关系,根据该关联关系在多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB,即网络设备基于该关联关系发送SSB,使得终端设备根据该关联关系监听网络设备所发送的SSB,可以提升终端设备解调SSB的成功率,在初始接入过程中, 缩短了终端设备初始接入的接入时延,提高了初始接入的可靠性,从而提升通信效率。In this embodiment, the network device first determines multiple candidate SSB group positions, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an association relationship; The relationship transmits the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position of the plurality of candidate SSB group positions. The network device sends the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship between different SSB groups, that is, the network device sends the SSB based on the association relationship, so that the terminal device can send the SSB according to the association relationship. The association relationship monitors the SSB sent by the network device, which can improve the success rate of the terminal device to demodulate the SSB. In the initial access process, the access delay of the initial access of the terminal device is shortened, and the reliability of the initial access is improved. , so as to improve the communication efficiency.
上面从方法的角度对本申请实施例进行了说明,下面从具体装置实现的角度对本申请实施例中的通信装置进行介绍。The embodiments of the present application are described above from the perspective of methods, and the following describes the communication devices in the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of specific device implementation.
请参阅图9,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置900,该通信装置900包括收发单元901以及处理单元902;Referring to FIG. 9 , an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device 900, the communication device 900 includes a transceiver unit 901 and a processing unit 902;
该收发单元901,用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,其中,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;The transceiver unit 901 is configured to receive first indication information from a network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions Group positions are associated;
该处理单元902,用于根据该第一指示信息和该关联关系在监听窗口内检测SSB。The processing unit 902 is configured to detect the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
可选的,可以将收发单元中用于实现接收功能的部分视为接收单元,将收发单元中用于实现发送功能的部分视为收发单元。Optionally, the part of the transceiver unit used to implement the receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the part of the transceiver unit used to implement the sending function may be regarded as a transceiver unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有该关联关系,其中,该至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。In a possible implementation manner, at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are respectively located at different candidates in the at least two candidate SSB group positions SSB group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该关联关系为准共址QCL关系。In a possible implementation manner, the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元901,还用于接收来自该网络设备的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于确定该关联关系;In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver unit 901 is further configured to receive second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship;
该处理单元902,还用于根据该第二指示信息确定该关联关系。The processing unit 902 is further configured to determine the association relationship according to the second indication information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该处理单元,具体用于根据该第二指示信息和第三指示信息确定该关联关系,该第三指示信息包括该第一指示信息、多个候选SSB位置、多个SSB组位置和/或SSB数量。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is specifically configured to determine the association relationship according to the second indication information and third indication information, where the third indication information includes the first indication information, multiple candidate SSB positions, Multiple SSB group positions and/or number of SSBs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息的比特数为n个,其中,该n为4、5或7。In a possible implementation manner, the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第一候选SSB组位置和该第二候选SSB组位置之间具有该关联关系;In a possible implementation manner, the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first candidate SSB group position and the first candidate SSB group position There is this association between the two candidate SSB group positions;
和/或,and / or,
该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第三候选SSB组位置和第四候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第三候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和该第二候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有该关联关系。The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and the second candidate SSB group position in the third candidate SSB group positions At least one candidate SSB position in the SSB group position has the association relationship.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息包括以下任意一项:In a possible implementation manner, the second indication information includes any one of the following:
subCarrierSpacingCommon与ssb-SubcarrierOffset;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon with ssb-SubcarrierOffset; or,
pdcch-ConfigSIB1;或,pdcch-ConfigSIB1; or,
controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero;或,searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero和searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset”和controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset" and controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, searchSpaceZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、controlResourceSetZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, controlResourceSetZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、searchSpaceZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero、searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero、controlResourceSetZero;或,searchSpaceZero, controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero。searchSpaceZero.
其中,subCarrierSpacingCommon表示指示信息块类型1配置(SIB1),(消息2/消息4)msg2/4,寻呼(paging)以及其它***消息(system information,SI)信息所使用的子载波间隔;此外,对于工作在非授权频段上的***,其可以用于表示指示Q值的其中一个比特;Among them, subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
ssb-SubcarrierOffset表示SSB中频域最低子载波与重叠(overlap)的公共资源块(common resource block,CRB)中频域最低子载波之间子载波的偏移;ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
pdcch-ConfigSIB1,包含参数控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)#0和参数搜索空间(SearchSpace)#0的参数和,用来指示相关类型0-物理下行控制信道(type0-PDCCH)的配置参数;pdcch-ConfigSIB1, including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
controlResourceSetZero表示用来配置CORESET#0的参数;controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
searchSpaceZero表示用来搜索CORESET#0的SearchSpace#0的参数。searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息的比特数为m个,其中,该m为2或3。In a possible implementation manner, the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该监听窗口包括发现参考信号DRS窗口、半帧时长或者同步信号突发集SS burst set占用时长。In a possible implementation manner, the listening window includes a discovery reference signal DRS window, a half-frame duration, or a occupied duration of a synchronization signal burst set SS burst set.
需要说明的是,上述通信装置900的单元的信息执行过程等内容,具体可参见本申请前述所示的方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that, for details such as the information execution process of the units of the communication apparatus 900, reference may be made to the descriptions in the method embodiments shown in the foregoing application, and details are not repeated here.
请参阅图10,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置1000,包括收发单元1001和处理单元1002;Referring to FIG. 10, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device 1000, including a transceiver unit 1001 and a processing unit 1002;
该处理单元1002,用于确定多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;The processing unit 1002 is configured to determine multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, and at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an associated relationship;
该收发单元1001,用于根据该关联关系在该多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB。The transceiver unit 1001 is configured to send an SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the plurality of candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship.
可选的,可以将收发单元中用于实现接收功能的部分视为接收单元,将收发单元中用于实现发送功能的部分视为收发单元。Optionally, the part of the transceiver unit used to implement the receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the part of the transceiver unit used to implement the sending function may be regarded as a transceiver unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有该关联关系,其中,该至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。In a possible implementation manner, at least two candidate SSB positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are respectively located at different candidates in the at least two candidate SSB group positions SSB group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该关联关系为准共址QCL关系。In a possible implementation manner, the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,且该第一候选SSB组位置和该第二候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系;In a possible implementation manner, the plurality of candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the first candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position have the association relation;
该收发单元1001具体用于:The transceiver unit 1001 is specifically used for:
在该第一候选SSB组位置前进行LBT;perform LBT before the first candidate SSB group position;
如果LBT失败,则在该第二候选组SSB位置发送该SSB。If the LBT fails, the SSB is sent at the second candidate group SSB location.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该多个候选SSB组位置包括第三候选SSB组位置和第四候选SSB组位置,其中,该第三候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB位置,该第四候选SSB位置包括第二候选SSB位置,且该第三候选SSB组位置和该第四候选SSB组位置具有该关联关系,该第一SSB位置和该第二SSB位置具有该关联关系;In a possible implementation manner, the plurality of candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, wherein the third candidate SSB group position includes a first candidate SSB group position, the fourth candidate SSB group position The candidate SSB position includes a second candidate SSB position, and the third candidate SSB group position and the fourth candidate SSB group position have the association relationship, and the first SSB position and the second SSB position have the association relationship;
该收发单元1001具体用于:The transceiver unit 1001 is specifically used for:
在该第一候选SSB位置进行LBT;perform LBT at the first candidate SSB position;
如果LBT失败,则在该第二候选SSB位置发送该SSB。If the LBT fails, the SSB is sent at the second candidate SSB location.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元1001,还用于发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置。In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver unit 1001 is further configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks SSB groups.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information includes a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息的比特数为n个,其中,该n为4、5或7。In a possible implementation manner, the number of bits of the first indication information is n, where n is 4, 5 or 7.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元1001,还用于发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于确定该关联关系。In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver unit 1001 is further configured to send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第五候选SSB组位置和第六候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第五候选SSB组位置和该第六候选SSB组位置之间具有该关联关系;In a possible implementation manner, the at least two candidate SSB group positions include a fifth candidate SSB group position and a sixth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the fifth candidate SSB group position and the sixth candidate SSB group position The six candidate SSB group positions have this association relationship;
和/或,and / or,
该至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第七候选SSB组位置和第八候选SSB组位置,该第二指示信息用于指示该第七候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和该第八候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有该关联关系。The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a seventh candidate SSB group position and an eighth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and the eighth candidate SSB group position in the seventh candidate SSB group positions At least one candidate SSB position in the SSB group position has the association relationship.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息包括以下任意一项:In a possible implementation manner, the second indication information includes any one of the following:
subCarrierSpacingCommon与ssb-SubcarrierOffset;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon with ssb-SubcarrierOffset; or,
pdcch-ConfigSIB1;或,pdcch-ConfigSIB1; or,
controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero;或,searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero和searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset”和controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset" and controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and searchSpaceZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, controlResourceSetZero; or,
subCarrierSpacingCommon、searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, searchSpaceZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、controlResourceSetZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, controlResourceSetZero; or,
ssb-SubcarrierOffset、searchSpaceZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero、searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero, searchSpaceZero; or,
controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero、controlResourceSetZero;或,searchSpaceZero, controlResourceSetZero; or,
searchSpaceZero。searchSpaceZero.
其中,subCarrierSpacingCommon表示指示信息块类型1配置(SIB1),(消息2/消息4)msg2/4,寻呼(paging)以及其它***消息(system information,SI)信息所使用的子载波间隔;此外,对于工作在非授权频段上的***,其可以用于表示指示Q值的其中一个比特;Among them, subCarrierSpacingCommon indicates the subcarrier spacing used by the indication information block type 1 configuration (SIB1), (message 2/message 4) msg2/4, paging (paging) and other system information (system information, SI) information; in addition, For systems operating in unlicensed frequency bands, it can be used to represent one of the bits indicating the Q value;
ssb-SubcarrierOffset表示SSB中频域最低子载波与重叠(overlap)的公共资源块(common resource block,CRB)中频域最低子载波之间子载波的偏移;ssb-SubcarrierOffset represents the subcarrier offset between the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the SSB and the lowest subcarrier in the frequency domain in the overlapping common resource block (common resource block, CRB);
pdcch-ConfigSIB1,包含参数控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)#0和参数搜索空间(SearchSpace)#0的参数和,用来指示相关类型0-物理下行控制信道(type0-PDCCH)的配置参数;pdcch-ConfigSIB1, including parameter sum of parameter control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) #0 and parameter search space (SearchSpace) #0, used to indicate the configuration parameters of related type 0-physical downlink control channel (type0-PDCCH) ;
controlResourceSetZero表示用来配置CORESET#0的参数;controlResourceSetZero indicates the parameters used to configure CORESET#0;
searchSpaceZero表示用来搜索CORESET#0的SearchSpace#0的参数。searchSpaceZero indicates the parameter of SearchSpace#0 used to search CORESET#0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息的比特数为m个,其中,该m为2或3。In a possible implementation manner, the number of bits of the second indication information is m, where m is 2 or 3.
需要说明的是,上述通信装置1000的单元的信息执行过程等内容,具体可参见本申请前述所示的方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that, for details such as the information execution process of the units of the communication apparatus 1000, reference may be made to the descriptions in the method embodiments shown in the foregoing application, which will not be repeated here.
请参阅图11,为本申请的实施例提供的上述实施例中所涉及的通信装置的结构示意图,其中,该通信装置具体可以为前述实施例中的网络设备,该通信装置的结构可以参考图11所示的结构。Please refer to FIG. 11 , which is a schematic structural diagram of the communication device involved in the above-mentioned embodiment provided for the embodiment of the present application, wherein the communication device may specifically be the network device in the foregoing embodiment, and the structure of the communication device may refer to FIG. 11 shows the structure.
通信装置包括至少一个处理器1111、至少一个存储器1112、至少一个收发器1113、至少一个网络接口1114和一个或多个天线1115。处理器1111、存储器1112、收发器1113和网络接口1114相连,例如通过总线相连,在本申请实施例中,所述连接可包括各类接口、传输线或总线等,本实施例对此不做限定。天线1115与收发器1113相连。网络接口1114用于使得通信装置通过通信链路,与其它通信设备相连,例如网络接口1114可以包括通信装置与核心网设备之间的网络接口,例如S1接口,网络接口可以包括通信装置和其他网络设备(例如其他接入网设备或者核心网设备)之间的网络接口,例如X2或者Xn接口。The communication device includes at least one processor 1111 , at least one memory 1112 , at least one transceiver 1113 , at least one network interface 1114 and one or more antennas 1115 . The processor 1111, the memory 1112, the transceiver 1113 and the network interface 1114 are connected, for example, through a bus. In this embodiment of the present application, the connection may include various interfaces, transmission lines, or buses, which are not limited in this embodiment. . The antenna 1115 is connected to the transceiver 1113 . The network interface 1114 is used to connect the communication device with other communication devices through a communication link. For example, the network interface 1114 may include a network interface between the communication device and the core network device, such as an S1 interface, and the network interface may include the communication device and other networks. A network interface between devices (such as other access network devices or core network devices), such as an X2 or Xn interface.
处理器1111主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个通信装置进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持通信装置执行实施例中所描述的动作。通信装置可以可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图11中的处理器1111可以集成基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同 的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储器中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。The processor 1111 is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs, for example, to support the communication device to perform the actions described in the embodiments. The communication device may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit. The baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data. The central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal equipment, execute software programs, and process data of software programs. . The processor 1111 in FIG. 11 may integrate the functions of a baseband processor and a central processing unit. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, interconnected by technologies such as a bus. Those skilled in the art can understand that a terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, a terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capability, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and communication data may be built in the processor, or may be stored in the memory in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。存储器1112可以是独立存在,与处理器1111相连。可选的,存储器1112可以和处理器1111集成在一起,例如集成在一个芯片之内。其中,存储器1112能够存储执行本申请实施例的技术方案的程序代码,并由处理器1111来控制执行,被执行的各类计算机程序代码也可被视为是处理器1111的驱动程序。The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data. The memory 1112 may exist independently and be connected to the processor 1111 . Optionally, the memory 1112 may be integrated with the processor 1111, for example, in one chip. The memory 1112 can store program codes for implementing the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and is controlled and executed by the processor 1111 .
图11仅示出了一个存储器和一个处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以为与处理器处于同一芯片上的存储元件,即片内存储元件,或者为独立的存储元件,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Figure 11 shows only one memory and one processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and multiple memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like. The memory may be a storage element on the same chip as the processor, that is, an on-chip storage element, or an independent storage element, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
收发器1113可以用于支持通信装置与终端之间射频信号的接收或者发送,收发器1113可以与天线1115相连。收发器1113包括发射机Tx和接收机Rx。具体地,一个或多个天线1115可以接收射频信号,该收发器1113的接收机Rx用于从天线接收所述射频信号,并将射频信号转换为数字基带信号或数字中频信号,并将该数字基带信号或数字中频信号提供给所述处理器1111,以便处理器1111对该数字基带信号或数字中频信号做进一步的处理,例如解调处理和译码处理。此外,收发器1113中的发射机Tx还用于从处理器1111接收经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号,并将该经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号转换为射频信号,并通过一个或多个天线1115发送所述射频信号。具体地,接收机Rx可以选择性地对射频信号进行一级或多级下混频处理和模数转换处理以得到数字基带信号或数字中频信号,所述下混频处理和模数转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。发射机Tx可以选择性地对经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号时进行一级或多级上混频处理和数模转换处理以得到射频信号,所述上混频处理和数模转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。数字基带信号和数字中频信号可以统称为数字信号。The transceiver 1113 may be used to support the reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between the communication device and the terminal, and the transceiver 1113 may be connected to the antenna 1115 . The transceiver 1113 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx. Specifically, one or more antennas 1115 can receive radio frequency signals, and the receiver Rx of the transceiver 1113 is used to receive the radio frequency signals from the antennas, convert the radio frequency signals into digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals, and convert the digital The baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal is provided to the processor 1111, so that the processor 1111 performs further processing on the digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal, such as demodulation processing and decoding processing. In addition, the transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1113 is also used to receive the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1111, and convert the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and pass a The radio frequency signal is transmitted by the antenna or antennas 1115. Specifically, the receiver Rx can selectively perform one or more stages of down-mixing processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the radio frequency signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal. The order of precedence is adjustable. The transmitter Tx can selectively perform one or more stages of up-mixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a radio frequency signal, and the up-mixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing The sequence of s is adjustable. Digital baseband signals and digital intermediate frequency signals can be collectively referred to as digital signals.
收发器也可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元中用于实现发送功能的器件视为收发单元,即收发单元包括接收单元和收发单元,接收单元也可以称为接收机、输入口、接收电路等,收发单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。A transceiver may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver, or the like. Optionally, the device used to implement the receiving function in the transceiver unit may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device used to implement the sending function in the transceiver unit may be regarded as a transceiver unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a transceiver unit, and the receiving unit also It can be called a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc., and the transceiver unit can be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
需要说明的是,图11所示通信装置具体可以用于实现图5至图8对应方法实施例中接入网设备所实现的步骤,并实现接入网设备对应的技术效果,图11所示通信装置的具体实现方式,均可以参考图5至图8对应的各个方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再一一赘述。It should be noted that, the communication apparatus shown in FIG. 11 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the access network equipment in the method embodiments corresponding to FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 , and realize the technical effects corresponding to the access network equipment, as shown in FIG. 11 . For the specific implementation manner of the communication apparatus, reference may be made to the descriptions in the respective method embodiments corresponding to FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 , which will not be repeated here.
请参阅图12,为本申请的实施例提供的上述实施例中所涉及的通信装置1200的一种可能的逻辑结构示意图,该通信装置具体可以为前述实施例中的终端设备,该通信装置1200可以包括但不限于处理器1201、通信端口1202、存储器1203、总线1204,在本申请的实施例中,处理器1201用于对通信装置1200的动作进行控制处理。Please refer to FIG. 12 , which is a schematic diagram of a possible logical structure of the communication apparatus 1200 involved in the above-mentioned embodiments provided by the embodiments of the present application. The communication apparatus may specifically be the terminal equipment in the foregoing embodiments. It may include, but is not limited to, a processor 1201 , a communication port 1202 , a memory 1203 , and a bus 1204 . In this embodiment of the present application, the processor 1201 is used to control and process the actions of the communication device 1200 .
此外,处理器1201可以是中央处理器单元,通用处理器,数字信号处理器,专用集成电路,现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。该处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,数字信号处理器和微处理器的组合等等。所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的***,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Furthermore, the processor 1201 may be a central processing unit, a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It may implement or execute the various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with this disclosure. The processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination comprising one or more microprocessors, a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, and the like. Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above may refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,图12所示通信装置具体可以用于实现图5至图8对应方法实施例中终端设备所实现的步骤,并实现终端设备对应的技术效果,图12所示通信装置的具体实现方式,均可以参考图5至图8对应的各个方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再一一赘述。It should be noted that the communication apparatus shown in FIG. 12 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the terminal equipment in the method embodiments corresponding to FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 , and realize the technical effects corresponding to the terminal equipment. For an implementation manner, reference may be made to the descriptions in the respective method embodiments corresponding to FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 , which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供一种存储一个或多个计算机执行指令的计算机可读存储介质,当计算机执行指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行如前述实施例中通信装置可能的实现方式所述的方法,其中,该通信装置具体可以为前述实施例中网络设备。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores one or more computer-executable instructions. When the computer-executable instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the possible implementations of the communication device in the foregoing embodiments. method, wherein the communication device may specifically be the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种存储一个或多个计算机执行指令的计算机可读存储介质,当计算机执行指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行如前述实施例中通信装置可能的实现方式所述的方法,其中,该通信装置具体可以为前述实施例中的终端设备。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores one or more computer-executable instructions. When the computer-executable instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the possible implementations of the communication device in the foregoing embodiments. method, wherein the communication device may specifically be the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种存储一个或多个计算机的计算机程序产品(或称计算机程序),当计算机程序产品被该处理器执行时,该处理器执行上述通信装置可能实现方式的方法,其中,该通信装置具体可以为前述实施例中的网络设备。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product (or computer program) that stores one or more computers. When the computer program product is executed by the processor, the processor executes the method for possible implementations of the above communication device, wherein , the communication apparatus may specifically be the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种存储一个或多个计算机的计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品被该处理器执行时,该处理器执行上述通信装置可能实现方式的方法,其中,该通信装置具体可以为前述实施例中的终端设备。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product that stores one or more computers. When the computer program product is executed by the processor, the processor executes the method for possible implementations of the above communication device, wherein the communication device may specifically be is the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片***,该芯片***包括处理器,用于支持通信装置实现上述通信装置可能的实现方式中所涉及的功能。在一种可能的设计中,该芯片***还可以包括存储器,存储器,用于保存该通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片***,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,其中,该通信装置具体可以为前述实施例中的网络设备。An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, which is configured to support the communication apparatus to implement the functions involved in the possible implementation manners of the foregoing communication apparatus. In a possible design, the chip system may further include a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the communication device. The chip system may be constituted by a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices, wherein the communication device may specifically be the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片***,该芯片***包括处理器,用于支持通信装置实现上述通信装置可能的实现方式中所涉及的功能。在一种可能的设计中,芯片***还可以包括存储器,存储器,用于保存该通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片***,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,其中,该通信装置具体可以为前述实施例中的终端设备。An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, which is configured to support the communication apparatus to implement the functions involved in the possible implementation manners of the foregoing communication apparatus. In a possible design, the chip system may further include a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the communication device. The chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices, wherein the communication device may specifically be the terminal equipment in the foregoing embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供了一种网络***架构,该网络***架构包括上述通信装置,该通信装置具体可以为前述实施例中的终端设备和网络设备。An embodiment of the present application further provides a network system architecture, where the network system architecture includes the foregoing communication apparatus, and the communication apparatus may specifically be the terminal equipment and the network equipment in the foregoing embodiments.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的***,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组 件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The integrated unit, if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solutions of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, Read-Only Memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), Random Access Memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Claims (39)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,其中,所述多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;The terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, wherein at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have connection relation;
    所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息和所述关联关系在监听窗口内检测SSB。The terminal device detects the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有所述关联关系,其中,所述至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于所述至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。The method according to claim 1, wherein at least two candidate SSB positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are respectively located in the at least two candidate SSB positions. Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述关联关系为准共址QCL关系。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息和所述关联关系在监听窗口内检测SSB之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein before the terminal device detects the SSB in the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship, the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述关联关系;receiving, by the terminal device, second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship;
    所述终端设备根据所述第二指示信息确定所述关联关系。The terminal device determines the association relationship according to the second indication information.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述第二指示信息确定所述关联关系包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein determining, by the terminal device, the association relationship according to the second indication information comprises:
    所述终端设备根据所述第二指示信息和第三指示信息确定所述关联关系,所述第三指示信息包括所述第一指示信息、多个候选SSB位置、多个SSB组位置和/或SSB数量。The terminal device determines the association relationship according to the second indication information and third indication information, where the third indication information includes the first indication information, multiple candidate SSB positions, multiple SSB group positions, and/or Number of SSBs.
  6. 根据权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first indication information comprises a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  7. 根据权利要求4至6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 4 to 6, wherein,
    所述至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一候选SSB组位置和所述第二候选SSB组位置之间具有所述关联关系;The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position have the stated relationship between them;
    和/或,and / or,
    所述至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第三候选SSB组位置和第四候选SSB组位置,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第三候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和所述第二候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有所述关联关系。The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and all of the third candidate SSB group positions. At least one candidate SSB position in the second candidate SSB group positions has the association relationship.
  8. 根据权利要求4至7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息包括以下任意一项:The method according to any one of claims 4 to 7, wherein the second indication information comprises any one of the following:
    公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon与同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset;或,Common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon and synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset; or,
    物理下行控制信道-信息块类型1配置pdcch-ConfigSIB1;或,physical downlink control channel-information block type 1 configuration pdcch-ConfigSIB1; or,
    控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero; or,
    搜索空间零searchSpaceZero;或,searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero和searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset”和controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset" and controlResourceSetZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and searchSpaceZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, searchSpaceZero; or,
    ssb-SubcarrierOffset、controlResourceSetZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    ssb-SubcarrierOffset、searchSpaceZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero、searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero, searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
    searchSpaceZero、controlResourceSetZero;或,searchSpaceZero, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    searchSpaceZero。searchSpaceZero.
  9. 根据权利要求1至8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述监听窗口包括发现参考信号DRS窗口、半帧时长或者同步信号突发集SS burst set占用时长。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the listening window comprises a discovery reference signal DRS window, a half frame duration or a occupied duration of a synchronization signal burst set SS burst set.
  10. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    网络设备确定多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,所述多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;The network device determines multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, and at least two candidate SSB group positions in the multiple candidate SSB group positions have an associated relationship;
    所述网络设备根据所述关联关系在所述多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB。The network device sends an SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the plurality of candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有所述关联关系,其中,所述至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于所述至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。The method according to claim 10, wherein at least two candidate SSB positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are respectively located in the at least two candidate SSB positions. Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述关联关系为准共址QCL关系。The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
  13. 根据权利要求10至12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,且所述第一候选SSB组位置和所述第二候选SSB组位置具有所述关联关系;所述网络设备根据所述关联关系在所述多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB包括:The method according to any one of claims 10 to 12, wherein the plurality of candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the first candidate SSB group position Having the association relationship with the second candidate SSB group position; the network device sending the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship includes:
    所述网络设备在所述第一候选SSB组位置前进行先听后说LBT;The network device performs listen-before-talk LBT before the first candidate SSB group position;
    如果LBT失败,则所述网络设备在所述第二候选组SSB位置发送所述SSB。If the LBT fails, the network device sends the SSB at the second candidate group SSB location.
  14. 根据权利要求10至13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10 to 13, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置。The network device sends first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the SSB group positions of the multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。The method according to claim 14, wherein the first indication information comprises a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  16. 根据权利要求10至15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10 to 15, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述关联关系。The network device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 16, wherein:
    所述至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第五候选SSB组位置和第六候选SSB组位置,所述 第二指示信息用于指示所述第五候选SSB组位置和所述第六候选SSB组位置之间具有所述关联关系;The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a fifth candidate SSB group position and a sixth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the fifth candidate SSB group position and the sixth candidate SSB group position have the stated relationship between them;
    和/或,and / or,
    所述至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第七候选SSB组位置和第八候选SSB组位置,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第七候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和所述第八候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有所述关联关系。The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a seventh candidate SSB group position and an eighth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and all of the seventh candidate SSB group positions. At least one candidate SSB position in the eighth candidate SSB group positions has the association relationship.
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息包括以下任意一项:The method according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the second indication information comprises any one of the following:
    公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon与同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset;或,Common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon and synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset; or,
    物理下行控制信道-信息块类型1配置pdcch-ConfigSIB1;或,physical downlink control channel-information block type 1 configuration pdcch-ConfigSIB1; or,
    控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero; or,
    搜索空间零searchSpaceZero;或,searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero和searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset”和controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset" and controlResourceSetZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and searchSpaceZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, searchSpaceZero; or,
    ssb-SubcarrierOffset、controlResourceSetZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    ssb-SubcarrierOffset、searchSpaceZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero、searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero, searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
    searchSpaceZero、controlResourceSetZero;或,searchSpaceZero, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    searchSpaceZero。searchSpaceZero.
  19. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括收发单元和处理单元;A communication device, comprising a transceiver unit and a processing unit;
    所述收发单元,用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,其中,所述多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;The transceiver unit is configured to receive first indication information from a network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate multiple candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, wherein at least two of the multiple candidate SSB group positions The candidate SSB group positions are associated;
    所述处理单元,用于根据所述第一指示信息和所述关联关系在监听窗口内检测SSB。The processing unit is configured to detect the SSB within the listening window according to the first indication information and the association relationship.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的装置,其特征在于,所述多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有所述关联关系,其中,所述至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于所述至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein at least two candidate SSB positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are respectively located in the at least two candidate SSB positions Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的装置,其特征在于,所述关联关系为准共址QCL关系。The apparatus according to claim 19 or 20, wherein the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
  22. 根据权利要求19至21任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 19 to 21, characterized in that:
    所述收发单元,还用于接收来自所述网络设备的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述关联关系;The transceiver unit is further configured to receive second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship;
    所述处理单元,还用于根据所述第二指示信息确定所述关联关系。The processing unit is further configured to determine the association relationship according to the second indication information.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的装置,其特征在于,The apparatus of claim 22, wherein:
    所述处理单元,具体用于根据所述第二指示信息和第三指示信息确定所述关联关系,所述第三指示信息包括所述第一指示信息、多个候选SSB位置、多个SSB组位置和/或SSB数量。The processing unit is specifically configured to determine the association relationship according to the second indication information and third indication information, where the third indication information includes the first indication information, multiple candidate SSB positions, and multiple SSB groups Location and/or number of SSBs.
  24. 根据权利要求19至23任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。The apparatus according to any one of claims 19 to 23, wherein the first indication information comprises a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  25. 根据权利要求22至24任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 22 to 24, characterized in that,
    所述至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一候选SSB组位置和所述第二候选SSB组位置之间具有所述关联关系;The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first candidate SSB group position and the second candidate SSB group position have the stated relationship between them;
    和/或,and / or,
    所述至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第三候选SSB组位置和第四候选SSB组位置,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第三候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和所述第二候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有所述关联关系。The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a third candidate SSB group position and a fourth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and all of the third candidate SSB group positions. At least one candidate SSB position in the second candidate SSB group positions has the association relationship.
  26. 根据权利要求22至25任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息包括以下任意一项:The apparatus according to any one of claims 22 to 25, wherein the second indication information comprises any one of the following:
    公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon与同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset;或,Common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon and synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset; or,
    物理下行控制信道-信息块类型1配置pdcch-ConfigSIB1;或,physical downlink control channel-information block type 1 configuration pdcch-ConfigSIB1; or,
    控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero; or,
    搜索空间零searchSpaceZero;或,searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero和searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset”和controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset" and controlResourceSetZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and searchSpaceZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, searchSpaceZero; or,
    ssb-SubcarrierOffset、controlResourceSetZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    ssb-SubcarrierOffset、searchSpaceZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero、searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero, searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
    searchSpaceZero、controlResourceSetZero;或,searchSpaceZero, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    searchSpaceZero。searchSpaceZero.
  27. 根据权利要求19至26任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述监听窗口包括发现参考信号DRS窗口、半帧时长或者同步信号突发集SS burst set占用时长。The apparatus according to any one of claims 19 to 26, wherein the listening window comprises a discovery reference signal DRS window, a half-frame duration or a occupied duration of a synchronization signal burst set SS burst set.
  28. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括收发单元和处理单元;A communication device, comprising a transceiver unit and a processing unit;
    所述处理单元,用于确定多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置,所述多个候选SSB组位置 中至少两个候选SSB组位置具有关联关系;The processing unit is configured to determine a plurality of candidate synchronization signal block SSB group positions, and at least two candidate SSB group positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions have an associated relationship;
    所述收发单元,用于根据所述关联关系在所述多个候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB组位置发送SSB。The transceiver unit is configured to send the SSB at at least one candidate SSB group position among the multiple candidate SSB group positions according to the association relationship.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,所述多个候选SSB组位置中至少两个候选SSB位置具有所述关联关系,其中,所述至少两个候选SSB位置分别位于所述至少两个候选SSB组位置中不同的候选SSB组。The apparatus according to claim 28, wherein at least two candidate SSB positions in the plurality of candidate SSB group positions have the association relationship, wherein the at least two candidate SSB positions are respectively located in the at least two candidate SSB positions. Candidate SSB groups that are different in the candidate SSB group positions.
  30. 根据权利要求28或29所述的装置,其特征在于,所述关联关系为准共址QCL关系。The apparatus according to claim 28 or 29, wherein the association relationship is a quasi-co-located QCL relationship.
  31. 根据权利要求28至30任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述多个候选SSB组位置包括第一候选SSB组位置和第二候选SSB组位置,且所述第一候选SSB组位置和所述第二候选SSB组位置具有所述关联关系;The apparatus according to any one of claims 28 to 30, wherein the plurality of candidate SSB group positions include a first candidate SSB group position and a second candidate SSB group position, and the first candidate SSB group position having the association relationship with the second candidate SSB group position;
    所述收发单元具体用于:The transceiver unit is specifically used for:
    在所述第一候选SSB组位置前进行LBT;performing LBT before the first candidate SSB group position;
    如果LBT失败,则在所述第二候选组SSB位置发送所述SSB。If the LBT fails, the SSB is sent at the second candidate group SSB location.
  32. 根据权利要求28至31任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 28 to 31, characterized in that:
    所述收发单元,还用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示多个候选同步信号块SSB组位置。The transceiver unit is further configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the SSB group positions of multiple candidate synchronization signal blocks.
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括物理广播信道PBCH负载和/或解调参考信号DMRS。The apparatus according to claim 32, wherein the first indication information comprises a physical broadcast channel PBCH load and/or a demodulation reference signal DMRS.
  34. 根据权利要求28至33任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 28 to 33, characterized in that,
    所述收发单元,还用于发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定所述关联关系。The transceiver unit is further configured to send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine the association relationship.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的装置,其特征在于,The apparatus of claim 34, wherein:
    所述至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第五候选SSB组位置和第六候选SSB组位置,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第五候选SSB组位置和所述第六候选SSB组位置之间具有所述关联关系;The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a fifth candidate SSB group position and a sixth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate the fifth candidate SSB group position and the sixth candidate SSB group position have the stated relationship between them;
    和/或,and / or,
    所述至少两个候选SSB组位置包括第七候选SSB组位置和第八候选SSB组位置,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第七候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置和所述第八候选SSB组位置中的至少一个候选SSB位置之间具有所述关联关系。The at least two candidate SSB group positions include a seventh candidate SSB group position and an eighth candidate SSB group position, and the second indication information is used to indicate at least one candidate SSB position and all of the seventh candidate SSB group positions. At least one candidate SSB position in the eighth candidate SSB group positions has the association relationship.
  36. 根据权利要求34或35所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息包括以下任意一项:The apparatus according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the second indication information includes any one of the following:
    公共子载波间隔subCarrierSpacingCommon与同步信号块子载波偏移ssb-SubcarrierOffset;或,Common subcarrier spacing subCarrierSpacingCommon and synchronization signal block subcarrier offset ssb-SubcarrierOffset; or,
    物理下行控制信道-信息块类型1配置pdcch-ConfigSIB1;或,physical downlink control channel-information block type 1 configuration pdcch-ConfigSIB1; or,
    控制资源集零controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero controlResourceSetZero; or,
    搜索空间零searchSpaceZero;或,searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero和searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset”和controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset" and controlResourceSetZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、ssb-SubcarrierOffset和searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, ssb-SubcarrierOffset, and searchSpaceZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、controlResourceSetZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    subCarrierSpacingCommon、searchSpaceZero;或,subCarrierSpacingCommon, searchSpaceZero; or,
    ssb-SubcarrierOffset、controlResourceSetZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    ssb-SubcarrierOffset、searchSpaceZero;或,ssb-SubcarrierOffset, searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero、searchSpaceZero;或,controlResourceSetZero, searchSpaceZero; or,
    controlResourceSetZero;或,controlResourceSetZero; or,
    searchSpaceZero、controlResourceSetZero;或,searchSpaceZero, controlResourceSetZero; or,
    searchSpaceZero。searchSpaceZero.
  37. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器和接口电路,其中A communication device, characterized by comprising at least one processor and an interface circuit, wherein
    所述接口电路,用于为所述至少一个处理器提供程序或指令;the interface circuit for providing programs or instructions for the at least one processor;
    所述至少一个处理器用于执行所述程序或指令,使得所述通信装置实现权利要求1至9任一项所述的方法。The at least one processor is configured to execute the program or instructions such that the communication device implements the method of any one of claims 1 to 9.
  38. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器和接口电路,其中A communication device, characterized by comprising at least one processor and an interface circuit, wherein
    所述接口电路,用于为所述至少一个处理器提供程序或指令;the interface circuit for providing programs or instructions for the at least one processor;
    所述至少一个处理器用于执行所述程序或指令,使得所述通信装置实现权利要求10至18任一项所述的方法。The at least one processor is configured to execute the program or instructions such that the communication device implements the method of any one of claims 10 to 18.
  39. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,其特征在于,在所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求10至18中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, the computer program product comprising a computer program or instructions, characterized in that, when the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is caused to perform the execution of any one of claims 1 to 9. or, causing the computer to perform the method of any one of claims 10 to 18.
PCT/CN2020/123396 2020-10-23 2020-10-23 Communication method and related device WO2022082767A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/123396 WO2022082767A1 (en) 2020-10-23 2020-10-23 Communication method and related device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/123396 WO2022082767A1 (en) 2020-10-23 2020-10-23 Communication method and related device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022082767A1 true WO2022082767A1 (en) 2022-04-28

Family

ID=81291228

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/123396 WO2022082767A1 (en) 2020-10-23 2020-10-23 Communication method and related device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022082767A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190222286A1 (en) * 2018-03-22 2019-07-18 Intel Corporation Inter-cell beam management
CN110474729A (en) * 2018-05-11 2019-11-19 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 The sending, receiving method and device, storage medium, base station, user equipment of synchronization signal block group in unlicensed spectrum
WO2020166043A1 (en) * 2019-02-14 2020-08-20 株式会社Nttドコモ User terminal and wireless communication method

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190222286A1 (en) * 2018-03-22 2019-07-18 Intel Corporation Inter-cell beam management
CN110474729A (en) * 2018-05-11 2019-11-19 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 The sending, receiving method and device, storage medium, base station, user equipment of synchronization signal block group in unlicensed spectrum
WO2020166043A1 (en) * 2019-02-14 2020-08-20 株式会社Nttドコモ User terminal and wireless communication method

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NTT DOCOMO, INC: "Enhancements to initial access procedure for NR-U", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1900954_ENHANCEMENTS TO INITIAL ACCESS PROCEDURE FOR NR-U_FINAL, vol. RAN WG1, 12 January 2019 (2019-01-12), Taipei, pages 1 - 9, XP051576490 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11075789B2 (en) Communication method, communications apparatus, and communications system
CN108347778B (en) Communication method and device
US20210377923A1 (en) Multi-downlink control information based transmission method, device, system, and storage medium
CA3059806C (en) Random access method, random access response method, terminal device, and network device
US20170164401A1 (en) Method and apparatus for space division multiple access for wireless local area network system
CN110999477B (en) Information indication method and related equipment
US10623159B2 (en) Data communication method, terminal, and base station
EP3720074A1 (en) Synchronous signal configuration method and apparatus
WO2020001607A1 (en) Data scrambling method and relevant device
WO2021032017A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US10756861B2 (en) Communication method, and related device and system
TWI683560B (en) User device and method for wireless communication system
US11490387B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
CA3053919A1 (en) Communication method, network device, terminal device, computer readable storage medium, computer program product, processing apparatus and communication system
US11381288B2 (en) Communication method, network device, and terminal device
CN114365537A (en) Uplink transmission method and device
CN115175361A (en) Communication method and device
CN113518434A (en) Communication method and device
WO2022194075A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2022082767A1 (en) Communication method and related device
CN113596862A (en) Transmission method and equipment
WO2022155824A1 (en) Reference signal transmission method and communication apparatus
WO2024011632A1 (en) Resource configuration method and apparatus, device, and storage medium
WO2022021085A1 (en) Information indication method and apparatus, terminal device, and network device
WO2023030205A1 (en) Resource indication method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20958349

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20958349

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1